Upload
others
View
2
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
General Class License Manualand other resources
http://www.arrl.org/shop/Licensing-Education-and-Training/
Course Overview
IntroductionProcedures and Practices
Rules and RegulationsComponents and Circuits
Radio Signals and EquipmentDigital Modes
AntennasPropagation
Electrical and RF Safety
2.1 HF Operating Techniques GOOD PRACTICES G1B08 — When choosing a transmitting frequency, what should you do to comply with good amateur practice? G2B01 — Which of the following is true concerning access to frequencies in non-emergency situations? G2B03 — What is good amateur practice if propagation changes during a contact and you notice interference from other stations
on the frequency? G2B04 — When selecting a CW transmitting frequency, what minimum separation should be used to minimize interference to
stations on adjacent frequencies? G2B05 — When selecting an SSB transmitting frequency, what minimum separation should be used to minimize interference to
stations on adjacent frequencies? G2B06 — What is a practical way to avoid harmful interference on an apparently clear frequency before calling CQ on CW or
phone? G2B07 — Which of the following complies with good amateur practice when choosing a frequency on which to initiate a call? G2C04 — What does the Q signal “QRL?” mean? G2D07 — Which of the following are examples of the NATO Phonetic Alphabet? G4A03 — What is normally meant by operating a transceiver in “split” mode? G4A12 — Which of the following is a common use for the dual-VFO feature on a transceiver?
Which of the following are examples of the NATO Phonetic Alphabet?
A. Able, Baker, Charlie, Dog
B. Adam, Boy, Charles, David
C. America, Boston, Canada, Denmark
D. Alpha, Bravo, Charlie, Delta
G2D07 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
Which of the following are examples of the NATO Phonetic Alphabet?
A. Able, Baker, Charlie, Dog
B. Adam, Boy, Charles, David
C. America, Boston, Canada, Denmark
D. Alpha, Bravo, Charlie, Delta
(D) G2D07 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
Which of the following complies with good amateur practice when choosing a frequency on which to initiate a call?
A. Check to see if the channel is assigned to another station
B. Identify your station by transmitting your call sign at least 3 times
C. Follow the voluntary band plan for the operating mode you intend to use
D. All these choices are correct
G2B07 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
Which of the following complies with good amateur practice when choosing a frequency on which to initiate a call?
A. Check to see if the channel is assigned to another station
B. Identify your station by transmitting your call sign at least 3 times
C. Follow the voluntary band plan for the operating mode you intend to use
D. All these choices are correct
(C) G2B07 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
When selecting a CW transmitting frequency, what minimum separation should be used to minimize interference to stations on
adjacent frequencies?
A. 5 to 50 Hz
B. 150 to 500 Hz
C. 1 to 3 kHz
D. 3 to 6 kHz
G2B04 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
When selecting a CW transmitting frequency, what minimum separation should be used to minimize interference to stations on
adjacent frequencies?
A. 5 to 50 Hz
B. 150 to 500 Hz
C. 1 to 3 kHz
D. 3 to 6 kHz
(B) G2B04 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
When selecting an SSB transmitting frequency, what minimum separation should be used to minimize interference to stations on
adjacent frequencies?
A. 5 to 50 Hz
B. 150 to 500 Hz
C. Approximately 3 kHz
D. Approximately 6 kHz
G2B05 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
When selecting an SSB transmitting frequency, what minimum separation should be used to minimize interference to stations on
adjacent frequencies?
A. 5 to 50 Hz
B. 150 to 500 Hz
C. Approximately 3 kHz
D. Approximately 6 kHz
(C) G2B05 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
What is a practical way to avoid harmful interference on an apparently clear frequency before calling CQ on CW or phone?
A. Send “QRL?” on CW, followed by your call sign; or, if using phone, ask if the frequency is in use, followed by your call sign
B. Listen for 2 minutes before calling CQC. Send the letter “V” in Morse code several times and listen for a response, or say
“test” several times and listen for a responseD. Send “QSY” on CW or if using phone, announce “the frequency is in use,” then give
your call sign and listen for a responseG2B06 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
What is a practical way to avoid harmful interference on an apparently clear frequency before calling CQ on CW or phone?
A. Send “QRL?” on CW, followed by your call sign; or, if using phone, ask if the frequency is in use, followed by your call sign
B. Listen for 2 minutes before calling CQC. Send the letter “V” in Morse code several times and listen for a response, or say
“test” several times and listen for a responseD. Send “QSY” on CW or if using phone, announce “the frequency is in use,” then give
your call sign and listen for a response(A) G2B06 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
What does the Q signal “QRL?” mean?
A. “Will you keep the frequency clear?”
B. “Are you operating full break-in?” or “Can you operate full break-in?”
C. “Are you listening only for a specific station?”
D. “Are you busy?” or “Is this frequency in use?”
G2C04 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
What does the Q signal “QRL?” mean?
A. “Will you keep the frequency clear?”
B. “Are you operating full break-in?” or “Can you operate full break-in?”
C. “Are you listening only for a specific station?”
D. “Are you busy?” or “Is this frequency in use?”
(D) G2C04 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
Which of the following is true concerning access to frequencies?
A. Nets always have priority
B. QSOs in progress always have priority
C. Except during emergencies, no amateur station has priority access to any frequency
D. Contest operations must always yield to non-contest use of frequencies
G2B01 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
Which of the following is true concerning access to frequencies?
A. Nets always have priority
B. QSOs in progress always have priority
C. Except during emergencies, no amateur station has priority access to any frequency
D. Contest operations must always yield to non-contest use of frequencies
(C) G2B01 GCLM Page (2 - 2)
When choosing a transmitting frequency, what should you do to comply with good amateur practice?
A. Ensure that the frequency and mode selected are within your license class privileges
B. Follow generally accepted band plans agreed to by the Amateur Radio community
C. Monitor the frequency before transmitting
D. All these choices are correct
FCC Rule: [97.101(a)] G1B08 GCLM Page (2 - 4)
When choosing a transmitting frequency, what should you do to comply with good amateur practice?
A. Ensure that the frequency and mode selected are within your license class privileges
B. Follow generally accepted band plans agreed to by the Amateur Radio community
C. Monitor the frequency before transmitting
D. All these choices are correct
(D) FCC Rule: [97.101(a)] G1B08 GCLM Page (2 - 4)
What is good amateur practice if propagation changes during a contact and you notice interference from other stations on
the frequency?
A. Tell the interfering stations to change frequency
B. Report the interference to your local Amateur Auxiliary Coordinator
C. Attempt to resolve the interference problem with the other stations in a mutually acceptable manner
D. Increase power to overcome interference
G2B03 GCLM Page (2 - 4)
What is good amateur practice if propagation changes during a contact and you notice interference from other stations on
the frequency?
A. Tell the interfering stations to change frequency
B. Report the interference to your local Amateur Auxiliary Coordinator
C. Attempt to resolve the interference problem with the other stations in a mutually acceptable manner
D. Increase power to overcome interference
(C) G2B03 GCLM Page (2 - 4)
What is normally meant by operating a transceiver in “split” mode?
A. The radio is operating at half power
B. The transceiver is operating from an external power source
C. The transceiver is set to different transmit and receive frequencies
D. The transmitter is emitting an SSB signal, as opposed to DSB operation
G4A03 GCLM Page (2 - 4)
What is normally meant by operating a transceiver in “split” mode?
A. The radio is operating at half power
B. The transceiver is operating from an external power source
C. The transceiver is set to different transmit and receive frequencies
D. The transmitter is emitting an SSB signal, as opposed to DSB operation
(C) G4A03 GCLM Page (2 - 4)
Which of the following is a common use for the dual-VFO feature on a transceiver?
A. To allow transmitting on two frequencies at once
B. To permit full duplex operation — that is, transmitting and receiving at the same time
C. To permit monitoring of two different frequencies
D. To facilitate computer interface
G4A12 GCLM Page (2 - 4)
Which of the following is a common use for the dual-VFO feature on a transceiver?
A. To allow transmitting on two frequencies at once
B. To permit full duplex operation — that is, transmitting and receiving at the same time
C. To permit monitoring of two different frequencies
D. To facilitate computer interface
(C) G4A12 GCLM Page (2 - 4)
Making Contacts
G1C12 — Which of the following is required by the FCC rules when operating in the 60-meter band? G2A08 — What is the recommended way to break in to a phone contact? G2A11 — Generally, who should respond to a station in the contiguous 48 states who calls “CQ DX”? G2B08 — What is the voluntary band plan restriction for U.S. stations transmitting within the 48 contiguous states in the 50.1 to
50.125 MHz band segment? G2D05 — Which of the following is a good way to indicate on a clear frequency in the HF phone bands that you are looking for a
contact with any station? G2D08 — What is a reason why many amateurs keep a station log? G2D09 — Which of the following is required when participating in a contest on HF frequencies?
Which of the following is a good way to indicate on a clear frequency in the HF phone bands that you are looking for a contact with any
station?
A. Sign your call sign once, followed by the words “listening for a call” -- if no answer, change frequency and repeat
B. Say “QTC” followed by “this is” and your call sign -- if no answer, change frequency and repeat
C. Repeat “CQ” a few times, followed by “this is,” then your call sign a few times, then pause to listen, repeat as necessary
D. Transmit an unmodulated carried for approximately 10 seconds, followed by “this is” and your call sign, and pause to listen -- repeat as necessary
G2D05 GCLM Page (2 - 5)
Which of the following is a good way to indicate on a clear frequency in the HF phone bands that you are looking for a contact with any
station?
A. Sign your call sign once, followed by the words “listening for a call” -- if no answer, change frequency and repeat
B. Say “QTC” followed by “this is” and your call sign -- if no answer, change frequency and repeat
C. Repeat “CQ” a few times, followed by “this is,” then your call sign a few times, then pause to listen, repeat as necessary
D. Transmit an unmodulated carried for approximately 10 seconds, followed by “this is” and your call sign, and pause to listen -- repeat as necessary
(C) G2D05 GCLM Page (2 - 5)
Generally, who should respond to a station in the contiguous 48 states who calls “CQ DX”?
A. Any caller is welcome to respond
B. Only stations in Germany
C. Any stations outside the lower 48 states
D. Only contest stations
G2A11 GCLM Page (2 - 5)
Generally, who should respond to a station in the contiguous 48 states who calls “CQ DX”?
A. Any caller is welcome to respond
B. Only stations in Germany
C. Any stations outside the lower 48 states
D. Only contest stations
(C) G2A11 GCLM Page (2 - 5)
What is the recommended way to break in to a phone contact?
A. Say "QRZ" several times followed by your call sign
B. Say your call sign once
C. Say "Breaker Breaker"
D. Say "CQ" followed by the call sign of either station
G2A08 GCLM Page (2 - 5)
What is the recommended way to break in to a phone contact?
A. Say "QRZ" several times followed by your call sign
B. Say your call sign once
C. Say "Breaker Breaker"
D. Say "CQ" followed by the call sign of either station
(B) G2A08 GCLM Page (2 - 5)
Which of the following is required when participating in a contest on HF frequencies?
A. Submit a log to the contest sponsor
B. Send a QSL card to the stations worked, or QSL via Logbook of The World
C. Identify your station per normal FCC regulations
D. All these choices are correct
G2D09 GCLM Page (2 - 5)
Which of the following is required when participating in a contest on HF frequencies?
A. Submit a log to the contest sponsor
B. Send a QSL card to the stations worked, or QSL via Logbook of The World
C. Identify your station per normal FCC regulations
D. All these choices are correct
(C) G2D09 GCLM Page (2 - 5)
What is the voluntary band plan restriction for U.S. stations transmitting within the 48 contiguous states in the 50.1 to
50.125 MHz band segment?
A. Only contacts with stations not within the 48 contiguous states
B. Only contacts with other stations within the 48 contiguous states
C. Only digital contacts
D. Only SSTV contacts
G2B08 GCLM Page (2 - 5)
What is the voluntary band plan restriction for U.S. stations transmitting within the 48 contiguous states in the 50.1 to
50.125 MHz band segment?
A. Only contacts with stations not within the 48 contiguous states
B. Only contacts with other stations within the 48 contiguous states
C. Only digital contacts
D. Only SSTV contacts
(A) G2B08 GCLM Page (2 - 5)
What is a reason why many amateurs keep a station log?
A. The ITU requires a log of all international contacts
B. The ITU requires a log of all international third-party traffic
C. The log provides evidence of operation needed to renew a license without retest
D. To help with a reply if the FCC requests information
G2D08 GCLM Page (2 - 6)
What is a reason why many amateurs keep a station log?
A. The ITU requires a log of all international contacts
B. The ITU requires a log of all international third-party traffic
C. The log provides evidence of operation needed to renew a license without retest
D. To help with a reply if the FCC requests information
(D) G2D08 GCLM Page (2 - 6)
Which of the following is required by the FCC rules when operating in the 60-meter band?
A. If you are using an antenna other than a dipole, you must keep a record of the gain of your antenna
B. You must keep a record of the date, time, frequency, power level, and stations worked
C. You must keep a record of all third-party traffic
D. You must keep a record of the manufacturer of your equipment and the antenna used
FCC Rule: [97.303(i)] G1C12 GCLM Page (2 - 6)
Which of the following is required by the FCC rules when operating in the 60-meter band?
A. If you are using an antenna other than a dipole, you must keep a record of the gain of your antenna
B. You must keep a record of the date, time, frequency, power level, and stations worked
C. You must keep a record of all third-party traffic
D. You must keep a record of the manufacturer of your equipment and the antenna used
(A) FCC Rule: [97.303(i)] G1C12 GCLM Page (2 - 6)
MODES
G2A01 — Which sideband is most commonly used for voice communications on frequencies of 14 MHz or higher? G2A02 — Which of the following modes is most commonly used for voice communications on the 160-meter, 75-meter, and 40-
meter bands? G2A03 — Which of the following is most commonly used for SSB voice communications in the VHF and UHF bands? G2A04 — Which mode is most commonly used for voice communications on the 17-meter and 12-meter bands? G2A05 — Which mode of voice communication is most commonly used on the HF amateur bands? G2A06 — Which of the following is an advantage when using single sideband as compared to other analog voice modes on the
HF amateur bands? G2A07 — Which of the following statements is true of the single sideband voice mode? G2A09 — Why do most amateur stations use lower sideband on the 160-meter, 75-meter and 40-meter bands?
Which mode of voice communication is most commonly used on the HF amateur bands?
A. Frequency modulation
B. Double sideband
C. Single sideband
D. Phase modulation
G2A05 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Which mode of voice communication is most commonly used on the HF amateur bands?
A. Frequency modulation
B. Double sideband
C. Single sideband
D. Phase modulation
(C) G2A05 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Which of the following is an advantage when using single sideband, as compared to other analog voice modes on the HF
amateur bands?
A. Very high fidelity voice modulation
B. Less subject to interference from atmospheric static crashes
C. Ease of tuning on receive and immunity to impulse noise
D. Less bandwidth used and greater power efficiency
G2A06 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Which of the following is an advantage when using single sideband, as compared to other analog voice modes on the HF
amateur bands?
A. Very high fidelity voice modulation
B. Less subject to interference from atmospheric static crashes
C. Ease of tuning on receive and immunity to impulse noise
D. Less bandwidth used and greater power efficiency
(D) G2A06 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Which of the following statements is true of the single sideband voice mode?
A. Only one sideband and the carrier are transmitted; the other sideband is suppressed
B. Only one sideband is transmitted; the other sideband and carrier are suppressed
C. SSB is the only voice mode that is authorized on the 20-meter, 15-meter, and 10-meter amateur bands
D. SSB is the only voice mode that is authorized on the 160-meter, 75-meter, and 40-meter amateur bands
G2A07 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Which of the following statements is true of the single sideband voice mode?
A. Only one sideband and the carrier are transmitted; the other sideband is suppressed
B. Only one sideband is transmitted; the other sideband and carrier are suppressed
C. SSB is the only voice mode that is authorized on the 20-meter, 15-meter, and 10-meter amateur bands
D. SSB is the only voice mode that is authorized on the 160-meter, 75-meter, and 40-meter amateur bands
(B) G2A07 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Which sideband is most commonly used for voice communications on frequencies of 14 MHz or higher?
A. Upper sideband
B. Lower sideband
C. Vestigial sideband
D. Double sideband
G2A01 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Which sideband is most commonly used for voice communications on frequencies of 14 MHz or higher?
A. Upper sideband
B. Lower sideband
C. Vestigial sideband
D. Double sideband
(A) G2A01 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Which of the following modes is most commonly used for voice communications on the 160-meter, 75-meter, and 40-meter
bands?
A. Upper sideband
B. Lower sideband
C. Vestigial sideband
D. Double sideband
G2A02 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Which of the following modes is most commonly used for voice communications on the 160-meter, 75-meter, and 40-meter
bands?
A. Upper sideband
B. Lower sideband
C. Vestigial sideband
D. Double sideband
(B) G2A02 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Which of the following is most commonly used for SSB voice communications in the VHF and UHF bands?
A. Upper sideband
B. Lower sideband
C. Vestigial sideband
D. Double sideband
G2A03 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Which of the following is most commonly used for SSB voice communications in the VHF and UHF bands?
A. Upper sideband
B. Lower sideband
C. Vestigial sideband
D. Double sideband
(A) G2A03 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Which mode is most commonly used for voice communications on the 17-meter and 12-meter bands?
A. Upper sideband
B. Lower sideband
C. Vestigial sideband
D. Double sideband
G2A04 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Which mode is most commonly used for voice communications on the 17-meter and 12-meter bands?
A. Upper sideband
B. Lower sideband
C. Vestigial sideband
D. Double sideband
(A) G2A04 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Why do most amateur stations use lower sideband on the 160-meter, 75-meter, and 40-meter bands?
A. Lower sideband is more efficient than upper sideband at these frequencies
B. Lower sideband is the only sideband legal on these frequency bands
C. Because it is fully compatible with an AM detector
D. It is good amateur practice
G2A09 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
Why do most amateur stations use lower sideband on the 160-meter, 75-meter, and 40-meter bands?
A. Lower sideband is more efficient than upper sideband at these frequencies
B. Lower sideband is the only sideband legal on these frequency bands
C. Because it is fully compatible with an AM detector
D. It is good amateur practice
(D) G2A09 GCLM Page (2 - 9)
HF RECEIVING
G2C07 — When sending CW, what does a “C” mean when added to the RST report? G2C10 — What does the Q signal “QRN” mean?
What does the Q signal “QRN” mean?
A. Send more slowly
B. Stop sending
C. Zero beat my signal
D. I am troubled by static
G2C10 GCLM Page (2 - 11)
What does the Q signal “QRN” mean?
A. Send more slowly
B. Stop sending
C. Zero beat my signal
D. I am troubled by static
(D) G2C10 GCLM Page (2 - 11)
When sending CW, what does a “C” mean when added to the RST report?
A. Chirpy or unstable signal
B. Report was read from an S meter rather than estimated
C. 100 percent copy
D. Key clicks
G2C07 GCLM Page (2 - 11)
When sending CW, what does a “C” mean when added to the RST report?
A. Chirpy or unstable signal
B. Report was read from an S meter rather than estimated
C. 100 percent copy
D. Key clicks
(A) G2C07 GCLM Page (2 - 11)
HF TRANSMITTING
G2A10 — Which of the following statements is true of voice VOX operation versus PTT operation? G2C01 — Which of the following describes full break-in telegraphy (QSK)? G2C02 — What should you do if a CW station sends “QRS”? G2C03 — What does it mean when a CW operator sends “KN” at the end of a transmission? G2C05 — What is the best speed to use when answering a CQ in Morse code? G2C06 — What does the term “zero beat” mean in CW operation? G2C08 — What prosign is sent to indicate the end of a formal message when using CW? G2C09 — What does the Q signal “QSL” mean? G2C11 — What does the Q signal “QRV” mean? G4A10 — What is the purpose of an electronic keyer?
Which of the following statements is true of voice VOX operation versus PTT operation?
A. The received signal is more natural sounding
B. It allows “hands free” operation
C. It occupies less bandwidth
D. It provides more power output
G2A10 GCLM Page (2 - 12)
Which of the following statements is true of voice VOX operation versus PTT operation?
A. The received signal is more natural sounding
B. It allows “hands free” operation
C. It occupies less bandwidth
D. It provides more power output
(B) G2A10 GCLM Page (2 - 12)
What is the purpose of an electronic keyer?
A. Automatic transmit/receive switching
B. Automatic generation of strings of dots and dashes for CW operation
C. VOX operation
D. Computer interface for PSK and RTTY operation
G4A10 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What is the purpose of an electronic keyer?
A. Automatic transmit/receive switching
B. Automatic generation of strings of dots and dashes for CW operation
C. VOX operation
D. Computer interface for PSK and RTTY operation
(B) G4A10 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
Which of the following describes full break-in telegraphy (QSK)?
A. Breaking stations send the Morse code prosign “BK”
B. Automatic keyers, instead of hand keys, are used to send Morse code
C. An operator must activate a manual send/receive switch before and after every transmission
D. Transmitting stations can receive between code characters and elements
G2C01 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
Which of the following describes full break-in telegraphy (QSK)?
A. Breaking stations send the Morse code prosign “BK”
B. Automatic keyers, instead of hand keys, are used to send Morse code
C. An operator must activate a manual send/receive switch before and after every transmission
D. Transmitting stations can receive between code characters and elements
(D) G2C01 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What prosign is sent to indicate the end of a formal message when using CW?
A. SK
B. BK
C. AR
D. KN
G2C08 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What prosign is sent to indicate the end of a formal message when using CW?
A. SK
B. BK
C. AR
D. KN
(C) G2C08 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What is the best speed to use when answering a CQ in Morse code?
A. The fastest speed at which you are comfortable copying, but no slower than the CQ
B. The fastest speed at which you are comfortable copying, but no faster than the CQ
C. At the standard calling speed of 10 wpm
D. At the standard calling speed of 5 wpm
G2C05 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What is the best speed to use when answering a CQ in Morse code?
A. The fastest speed at which you are comfortable copying, but no slower than the CQ
B. The fastest speed at which you are comfortable copying, but no faster than the CQ
C. At the standard calling speed of 10 wpm
D. At the standard calling speed of 5 wpm
(B) G2C05 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What should you do if a CW station sends “QRS?”
A. Send slower
B. Change frequency
C. Increase your power
D. Repeat everything twice
G2C02 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What should you do if a CW station sends “QRS?”
A. Send slower
B. Change frequency
C. Increase your power
D. Repeat everything twice
(A) G2C02 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What does the term “zero beat” mean in CW operation?
A. Matching the speed of the transmitting station
B. Operating split to avoid interference on frequency
C. Sending without error
D. Matching the transmit frequency to the frequency of a received signal
G2C06 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What does the term “zero beat” mean in CW operation?
A. Matching the speed of the transmitting station
B. Operating split to avoid interference on frequency
C. Sending without error
D. Matching the transmit frequency to the frequency of a received signal
(D) G2C06 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What does it mean when a CW operator sends “KN” at the end of a transmission?
A. Listening for novice stations
B. Operating full break-in
C. Listening only for a specific station or stations
D. Closing station now
G2C03 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What does it mean when a CW operator sends “KN” at the end of a transmission?
A. Listening for novice stations
B. Operating full break-in
C. Listening only for a specific station or stations
D. Closing station now
(C) G2C03 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What does the Q signal “QSL” mean?
A. Send slower
B. We have already confirmed by card
C. I acknowledge receipt
D. We have worked before
G2C09 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What does the Q signal “QSL” mean?
A. Send slower
B. We have already confirmed by card
C. I acknowledge receipt
D. We have worked before
(C) G2C09 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What does the Q signal “QRV” mean?
A. You are sending too fast
B. There is interference on the frequency
C. I am quitting for the day
D. I am ready to receive messages
G2C11 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
What does the Q signal “QRV” mean?
A. You are sending too fast
B. There is interference on the frequency
C. I am quitting for the day
D. I am ready to receive messages
(D) G2C11 GCLM Page (2 - 13)
2.2 Emergency Operation
G2B02 — What is the first thing you should do if you are communicating with another amateur station and hear a station in distress break in?
G2B09 — Who may be the control operator of an amateur station transmitting in RACES to assist relief operations during a disaster?
G2B10 — When is an amateur station allowed to use any means at its disposal to assist another station in distress? G2B11 — What frequency should be used to send a distress call?
Who may be the control operator of an amateur station transmitting in RACES to assist relief operations during
a disaster?
A. Only a person holding an FCC-issued amateur operator license
B. Only a RACES net control operator
C. A person holding an FCC-issued amateur operator license or an appropriate government official
D. Any control operator when normal communication systems are operational
FCC Rule: [97.407(a)] G2B09 GCLM Page (2 - 17)
Who may be the control operator of an amateur station transmitting in RACES to assist relief operations during
a disaster?
A. Only a person holding an FCC-issued amateur operator license
B. Only a RACES net control operator
C. A person holding an FCC-issued amateur operator license or an appropriate government official
D. Any control operator when normal communication systems are operational
(A) FCC Rule: [97.407(a)] G2B09 GCLM Page (2 - 17)
What is the first thing you should do if you are communicating with another amateur station and hear a station in distress break in?
A. Continue your communication because you were on the frequency first
B. Acknowledge the station in distress and determine what assistance may be needed
C. Change to a different frequency
D. Immediately cease all transmissions
G2B02 GCLM Page (2 - 18)
What is the first thing you should do if you are communicating with another amateur station and hear a station in distress break in?
A. Continue your communication because you were on the frequency first
B. Acknowledge the station in distress and determine what assistance may be needed
C. Change to a different frequency
D. Immediately cease all transmissions
(B) G2B02 GCLM Page (2 - 18)
When is an amateur station allowed to use any means at its disposal to assist another station in distress?
A. Only when transmitting in RACES
B. At any time when transmitting in an organized net
C. At any time during an actual emergency
D. Only on authorized HF frequencies
FCC Rule: [97.405(b)] G2B10 GCLM Page (2 - 18)
When is an amateur station allowed to use any means at its disposal to assist another station in distress?
A. Only when transmitting in RACES
B. At any time when transmitting in an organized net
C. At any time during an actual emergency
D. Only on authorized HF frequencies
(C) FCC Rule: [97.405(b)] G2B10 GCLM Page (2 - 18)
What frequency should be used to send a distress call?
A. Whichever frequency has the best chance of communicating the distress message
B. Only frequencies authorized for RACES or ARES stations
C. Only frequencies that are within your operating privileges
D. Only frequencies used by police, fire, or emergency medical services
FCC Rule: [97.405] G2B11 GCLM Page (2 - 18)
What frequency should be used to send a distress call?
A. Whichever frequency has the best chance of communicating the distress message
B. Only frequencies authorized for RACES or ARES stations
C. Only frequencies that are within your operating privileges
D. Only frequencies used by police, fire, or emergency medical services
(A) FCC Rule: [97.405] G2B11 GCLM Page (2 - 18)
Course Overview
IntroductionProcedures and Practices
Rules and RegulationsComponents and Circuits
Radio Signals and EquipmentDigital Modes
AntennasPropagation
Electrical and RF Safety
3.1 Regulatory Agencies
G1A14 — Which of the following may apply in areas under FCC jurisdiction outside of ITU Region 2? G1B01 — What is the maximum height above ground to which an antenna structure may be erected without requiring
notification to the FAA and registration with the FCC, provided it is not at or near a public use airport? G1B06 — Under what conditions are state and local governments permitted to regulate Amateur Radio antenna structures? G1E06 — The frequency allocations of which ITU region apply to radio amateurs operating in North and South America? G2D01 — What is the Volunteer Monitoring Program? G2D02 — Which of the following are objectives of the Volunteer Monitoring Program? G2D03 — What skills learned during hidden transmitter hunts are of help to the Volunteer Monitoring Program?
The frequency allocations of which ITU region apply to radio amateurs operating in North and South America?
A. Region 4
B. Region 3
C. Region 2
D. Region 1
FCC Rule: [97.301, ITU Radio Regulations] G1E06 GCLM Page (3 - 2)
The frequency allocations of which ITU region apply to radio amateurs operating in North and South America?
A. Region 4
B. Region 3
C. Region 2
D. Region 1
(C) FCC Rule: [97.301, ITU Radio Regulations] G1E06 GCLM Page (3 - 2)
Which of the following may apply in areas under FCC jurisdiction outside of ITU Region 2?
A. Station identification may have to be in a language other than English
B. Morse code may not be permitted
C. Digital transmission may not be permitted
D. Frequency allocations may differ
FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A14 GCLM Page (3 - 2)
Which of the following may apply in areas under FCC jurisdiction outside of ITU Region 2?
A. Station identification may have to be in a language other than English
B. Morse code may not be permitted
C. Digital transmission may not be permitted
D. Frequency allocations may differ
(D) FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A14 GCLM Page (3 - 2)
Which of the following are objectives of the Volunteer Monitoring Program?
A. To conduct efficient and orderly amateur licensing examinations
B. To encourage self-regulation and compliance with the rules by radio amateur operators
C. To coordinate repeaters for efficient and orderly spectrum usage
D. To provide emergency and public safety communications
G2D02 GCLM Page (3 - 2)
Which of the following are objectives of the Volunteer Monitoring Program?
A. To conduct efficient and orderly amateur licensing examinations
B. To encourage self-regulation and compliance with the rules by radio amateur operators
C. To coordinate repeaters for efficient and orderly spectrum usage
D. To provide emergency and public safety communications
(B) G2D02 GCLM Page (3 - 2)
What is the Volunteer Monitoring Program?
A. Amateur volunteers who are formally enlisted to monitor the airwaves for rules violations
B. Amateur volunteers who conduct amateur licensing examinationsC. Amateur volunteers who conduct frequency coordination for amateur VHF
repeatersD. Amateur volunteers who use their station equipment to help civil defense
organizations in times of emergencyG2D01 GCLM Page (3 - 3)
What is the Volunteer Monitoring Program?
A. Amateur volunteers who are formally enlisted to monitor the airwaves for rules violations
B. Amateur volunteers who conduct amateur licensing examinationsC. Amateur volunteers who conduct frequency coordination for amateur VHF
repeatersD. Amateur volunteers who use their station equipment to help civil defense
organizations in times of emergency(A) G2D01 GCLM Page (3 - 3)
What skills learned during hidden transmitter hunts are of help to the Volunteer Monitoring Program?
A. Identification of out of band operation
B. Direction finding used to locate stations violating FCC Rules
C. Identification of different call signs
D. Hunters have an opportunity to transmit on non-amateur frequencies
G2D03 GCLM Page (3 - 3)
What skills learned during hidden transmitter hunts are of help to the Volunteer Monitoring Program?
A. Identification of out of band operation
B. Direction finding used to locate stations violating FCC Rules
C. Identification of different call signs
D. Hunters have an opportunity to transmit on non-amateur frequencies
(B) G2D03 GCLM Page (3 - 3)
What is the maximum height above ground to which an antenna structure may be erected without requiring notification to the FAA
and registration with the FCC, provided it is not at or near a public use airport?
A. 50 feet
B. 100 feet
C. 200 feet
D. 300 feet
FCC Rule: [97.15(a)] G1B01 GCLM Page (3 - 3)
What is the maximum height above ground to which an antenna structure may be erected without requiring notification to the FAA
and registration with the FCC, provided it is not at or near a public use airport?
A. 50 feet
B. 100 feet
C. 200 feet
D. 300 feet
(C) FCC Rule: [97.15(a)] G1B01 GCLM Page (3 - 3)
Under what conditions are state and local governments permitted to regulate Amateur Radio antenna structures?
A. Under no circumstances, FCC rules take priority
B. At any time and to any extent necessary to accomplish a legitimate purpose of the state or local entity, provided that proper filings are made with the FCC
C. Only when such structures exceed 50 feet in height and are clearly visible 1000 feet from the structure
D. Amateur Service communications must be reasonably accommodated, and regulations must constitute the minimum practical to accommodate a legitimate purpose of the state or local entity
FCC Rule: [97.15(b), PRB-1, 101 FCC 2d 952 (1985)] G1B06 GCLM Page (3 - 3)
Under what conditions are state and local governments permitted to regulate Amateur Radio antenna structures?
A. Under no circumstances, FCC rules take priority
B. At any time and to any extent necessary to accomplish a legitimate purpose of the state or local entity, provided that proper filings are made with the FCC
C. Only when such structures exceed 50 feet in height and are clearly visible 1000 feet from the structure
D. Amateur Service communications must be reasonably accommodated, and regulations must constitute the minimum practical to accommodate a legitimate purpose of the state or local entity
(D) FCC Rule: [97.15(b), PRB-1, 101 FCC 2d 952 (1985)] G1B06 GCLM Page (3 - 3)
3.2 Amateur Licensing Rules
G1D01 — Who may receive credit for the elements represented by an expired amateur radio license? G1D02 — What license examinations may you administer when you are an accredited VE holding a General Class operator
license? G1D03 — On which of the following band segments may you operate if you are a Technician Class operator and have a CSCE for
General Class privileges? G1D04 — Which of the following is a requirement for administering a Technician Class license examination? G1D05 — Which of the following must a person have before they can be an administering VE for a Technician Class license
examination? G1D06 — When must you add the special identifier “AG” after your call sign if you are a Technician Class licensee and have a
CSCE for General Class operator privileges, but the FCC has not yet posted your upgrade on its website ? G1D07 — Volunteer Examiners are accredited by what organization? G1D08 — Which of the following criteria must be met for a non-US citizen to be an accredited Volunteer Examiner? G1D09 — How long is a Certificate of Successful Completion of Examination (CSCE) valid for exam element credit? G1D10 — What is the minimum age that one must be to qualify as an accredited Volunteer Examiner? G1D11 — What is required to obtain a new General Class license after a previously-held license has expired and the two-year
grace period has passed?
Which of the following must a person have before they can be an administering VE for a Technician class license examination?
A. Notification to the FCC that you want to give an examination
B. Receipt of a Certificate of Successful Completion of Examination (CSCE) for General class
C. Possession of a properly obtained telegraphy license
D. An FCC General class or higher license and VEC accreditation
FCC Rule: [97.509(b)(3)(i)] G1D05 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
Which of the following must a person have before they can be an administering VE for a Technician class license examination?
A. Notification to the FCC that you want to give an examination
B. Receipt of a Certificate of Successful Completion of Examination (CSCE) for General class
C. Possession of a properly obtained telegraphy license
D. An FCC General class or higher license and VEC accreditation
(D) FCC Rule: [97.509(b)(3)(i)] G1D05 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
Volunteer Examiners are accredited by what organization?
A. The Federal Communications Commission
B. The Universal Licensing System
C. A Volunteer Examiner Coordinator
D. The Wireless Telecommunications Bureau
FCC Rule: [97.509(b)(1)] G1D07 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
Volunteer Examiners are accredited by what organization?
A. The Federal Communications Commission
B. The Universal Licensing System
C. A Volunteer Examiner Coordinator
D. The Wireless Telecommunications Bureau
(C) FCC Rule: [97.509(b)(1)] G1D07 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
Which of the following criteria must be met for a non-U.S. citizen to be an accredited Volunteer Examiner?
A. The person must be a resident of the U.S. for a minimum of 5 years
B. The person must hold an FCC granted Amateur Radio license of General class or above
C. The person’s home citizenship must be in ITU region 2
D. None of these choices is correct; a non-U.S. citizen cannot be a Volunteer Examiner
FCC Rule: [97.509(b)(3)] G1D08 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
Which of the following criteria must be met for a non-U.S. citizen to be an accredited Volunteer Examiner?
A. The person must be a resident of the U.S. for a minimum of 5 years
B. The person must hold an FCC granted Amateur Radio license of General class or above
C. The person’s home citizenship must be in ITU region 2
D. None of these choices is correct; a non-U.S. citizen cannot be a Volunteer Examiner
(B) FCC Rule: [97.509(b)(3)] G1D08 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
What is the minimum age that one must be to qualify as an accredited Volunteer Examiner?
A. 12 years
B. 18 years
C. 21 years
D. There is no age limit
FCC Rule: [97.509(b)(2)] G1D10 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
What is the minimum age that one must be to qualify as an accredited Volunteer Examiner?
A. 12 years
B. 18 years
C. 21 years
D. There is no age limit
(B) FCC Rule: [97.509(b)(2)] G1D10 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
Which of the following is a requirement for administering a Technician class license examination?
A. At least three General class or higher VEs must observe the examination
B. At least two General class or higher VEs must be present
C. At least two General class or higher VEs must be present, but only one need be Amateur Extra class
D. At least three VEs of Technician class or higher must observe the examination
FCC Rule: [97.509(3)(i)(c)] G1D04 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
Which of the following is a requirement for administering a Technician class license examination?
A. At least three General class or higher VEs must observe the examination
B. At least two General class or higher VEs must be present
C. At least two General class or higher VEs must be present, but only one need be Amateur Extra class
D. At least three VEs of Technician class or higher must observe the examination
(A) FCC Rule: [97.509(3)(i)(c)] G1D04 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
What license examinations may you administer when you are an accredited VE holding a General class operator license?
A. General and Technician
B. General only
C. Technician only
D. Amateur Extra, General, and Technician
FCC Rule: [97.509(b)(3)(i)] G1D02 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
What license examinations may you administer when you are an accredited VE holding a General class operator license?
A. General and Technician
B. General only
C. Technician only
D. Amateur Extra, General, and Technician
(C) FCC Rule: [97.509(b)(3)(i)] G1D02 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
How long is a Certificate of Successful Completion of Examination (CSCE) valid for exam element credit?
A. 30 days
B. 180 days
C. 365 days
D. For as long as your current license is valid
FCC Rule: [97.9(b)] G1D09 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
How long is a Certificate of Successful Completion of Examination (CSCE) valid for exam element credit?
A. 30 days
B. 180 days
C. 365 days
D. For as long as your current license is valid
(C) FCC Rule: [97.9(b)] G1D09 GCLM Page (3 - 4)
On which of the following band segments may you operate if you are a Technician class operator and have a Certificate of Successful
Completion of Examination (CSCE) for General class privileges?
A. Only the Technician band segments until your upgrade is posted in the FCC database
B. Only on the Technician band segments until your license arrives in the mail
C. On any General or Technician class band segment
D. On any General or Technician class band segment except 30 meters and 60 meters
FCC Rule: [97.9(b)] G1D03 GCLM Page (3 - 5)
On which of the following band segments may you operate if you are a Technician class operator and have a Certificate of Successful
Completion of Examination (CSCE) for General class privileges?
A. Only the Technician band segments until your upgrade is posted in the FCC database
B. Only on the Technician band segments until your license arrives in the mail
C. On any General or Technician class band segment
D. On any General or Technician class band segment except 30 meters and 60 meters
(C) FCC Rule: [97.9(b)] G1D03 GCLM Page (3 - 5)
When must you add the special identifier "AG" after your call sign if you are a Technician class licensee and have a Certificate of Successful
Completion of Examination (CSCE) for General class operator privileges, but the FCC has not yet posted your upgrade on its website?
A. Whenever you operate using General class frequency privilegesB. Whenever you operate on any amateur frequencyC. Whenever you operate using Technician frequency privilegesD. A special identifier is not required if your General class license application has been
filed with the FCCFCC Rule: [97.119(f)(2)] G1D06 GCLM Page (3 - 5)
When must you add the special identifier "AG" after your call sign if you are a Technician class licensee and have a Certificate of Successful
Completion of Examination (CSCE) for General class operator privileges, but the FCC has not yet posted your upgrade on its website?
A. Whenever you operate using General class frequency privilegesB. Whenever you operate on any amateur frequencyC. Whenever you operate using Technician frequency privilegesD. A special identifier is not required if your General class license application has been
filed with the FCC(A) FCC Rule: [97.119(f)(2)] G1D06 GCLM Page (3 - 5)
Who may receive partial credit for the elements represented by an expired Amateur Radio license?
A. Any person who can demonstrate that they once held an FCC-issued General, Advanced, or Amateur Extra class license that was not revoked by the FCC
B. Anyone who held an FCC-issued Amateur Radio license that has been expired for not less than 5 years and not more than 15 years
C. Any person who previously held an amateur license issued by another country, but only if that country has a current reciprocal licensing agreement with the FCC
D. Only persons who once held an FCC issued Novice, Technician, or Technician Plus license
FCC Rule: [97.501, 97.505(a)] G1D01 GCLM Page (3 - 5)
Who may receive partial credit for the elements represented by an expired Amateur Radio license?
A. Any person who can demonstrate that they once held an FCC-issued General, Advanced, or Amateur Extra class license that was not revoked by the FCC
B. Anyone who held an FCC-issued Amateur Radio license that has been expired for not less than 5 years and not more than 15 years
C. Any person who previously held an amateur license issued by another country, but only if that country has a current reciprocal licensing agreement with the FCC
D. Only persons who once held an FCC issued Novice, Technician, or Technician Plus license
(A) FCC Rule: [97.501, 97.505(a)] G1D01 GCLM Page (3 - 5)
What is required to obtain a new General Class license after a previously-held license has expired and the two-year grace
period has passed?
A. They must have a letter from the FCC showing they once held an amateur or commercial license
B. There are no requirements other than being able to show a copy of the expired license
C. The applicant must be able to produce a copy of a page from a call book published in the U.S. showing his or her name and address
D. The applicant must pass the current Element 2 examFCC Rule: [97.505] G1D11 GCLM Page (3 - 5)
What is required to obtain a new General Class license after a previously-held license has expired and the two-year grace
period has passed?
A. They must have a letter from the FCC showing they once held an amateur or commercial license
B. There are no requirements other than being able to show a copy of the expired license
C. The applicant must be able to produce a copy of a page from a call book published in the U.S. showing his or her name and address
D. The applicant must pass the current Element 2 exam(D) FCC Rule: [97.505] G1D11 GCLM Page (3 - 5)
3.3 Control Operator Privileges and Rules G1A01 — On which HF/MF bands is a General class license holder granted all amateur frequency privileges? G1A02 — On which of the following bands is phone operation prohibited? G1A03 — On which of the following bands is image transmission prohibited? G1A04 — On which of the following bands is image transmission prohibited? G1A05 — Which of the following frequencies is in the General Class portion of the 40-meter band? G1A06 — Which of the following frequencies is within the General Class portion of the 75-meter phone band? G1A07 — Which of the following frequencies is within the General Class portion of the 20-meter phone band? G1A08 — Which of the following frequencies is within the General Class portion of the 80-meter band? G1A09 — Which of the following frequencies is within the General Class portion of the 15-meter band? G1A10 — Which of the following frequencies is available to a control operator holding a General Class license? G1A11 — When General class licensees are not permitted to use the entire voice portion of a band, which portion of the voice segment is generally available to them? G1A12 — Which of the following applies when the FCC rules designate the Amateur Service as a secondary user on a band? G1A13 — What is the appropriate action if, when operating on either the 30 or 60-meter bands, a station in the primary service interferes with your contact? G1A15 — What portion of the 10-meter band is available for repeater use? G1B02 — With which of the following conditions must beacon stations comply? G1B03 — Which of the following is a purpose of a beacon station as identified in the FCC rules? G1B09 — On what HF frequencies are automatically controlled (unattended) beacons permitted? G1B10 — What is the power limit for beacon stations? G1E04 — Which of the following conditions require a licensed Amateur Radio operator to take specific steps to avoid harmful interference to other users or facilities? G1E07 — In what part of the 13-centimeter band may an amateur station communicate with non-licensed Wi-Fi stations? G1E10 — Why should an amateur operator normally avoid transmitting on 14.100, 18.110, 21.150, 24. 930 and 28.200 MHz? G8C01 — On what band do amateurs share channels with the unlicensed Wi-Fi service?
Which of the following frequencies is in the General class portion of the 40-meter band (in ITU Region 2)?
A. 7.250 MHz
B. 7.500 MHz
C. 40.200 MHz
D. 40.500 MHz
FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A05 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following frequencies is in the General class portion of the 40-meter band (in ITU Region 2)?
A. 7.250 MHz
B. 7.500 MHz
C. 40.200 MHz
D. 40.500 MHz
(A) FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A05 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following frequencies is within the General class portion of the 75-meter phone band?
A. 1875 kHz
B. 3750 kHz
C. 3900 kHz
D. 4005 kHz
FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A06 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following frequencies is within the General class portion of the 75-meter phone band?
A. 1875 kHz
B. 3750 kHz
C. 3900 kHz
D. 4005 kHz
(C) FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A06 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following frequencies is within the General class portion of the 20-meter phone band?
A. 14005 kHz
B. 14105 kHz
C. 14305 kHz
D. 14405 kHz
FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A07 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following frequencies is within the General class portion of the 20-meter phone band?
A. 14005 kHz
B. 14105 kHz
C. 14305 kHz
D. 14405 kHz
(C) FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A07 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following frequencies is within the General class portion of the 80-meter band?
A. 1855 kHz
B. 2560 kHz
C. 3560 kHz
D. 3650 kHz
FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A08 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following frequencies is within the General class portion of the 80-meter band?
A. 1855 kHz
B. 2560 kHz
C. 3560 kHz
D. 3650 kHz
(C) FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A08 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following frequencies is within the General class portion of the 15-meter band?
A. 14250 kHz
B. 18155 kHz
C. 21300 kHz
D. 24900 kHz
FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A09 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following frequencies is within the General class portion of the 15-meter band?
A. 14250 kHz
B. 18155 kHz
C. 21300 kHz
D. 24900 kHz
(C) FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A09 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following frequencies is available to a control operator holding a General class license?
A. 28.020 MHz
B. 28.350 MHz
C. 28.550 MHz
D. All these choices are correct
FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A10 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following frequencies is available to a control operator holding a General class license?
A. 28.020 MHz
B. 28.350 MHz
C. 28.550 MHz
D. All these choices are correct
(D) FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A10 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
When General class licensees are not permitted to use the entire voice portion of a band, which portion of the voice segment is
generally available to them?
A. The lower frequency end
B. The upper frequency end
C. The lower frequency end on frequencies below 7.3 MHz, and the upper end on frequencies above 14.150 MHz
D. The upper frequency end on frequencies below 7.3 MHz, and the lower end on frequencies above 14.150 MHz
FCC Rule: [97.301] G1A11 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
When General class licensees are not permitted to use the entire voice portion of a band, which portion of the voice segment is
generally available to them?
A. The lower frequency end
B. The upper frequency end
C. The lower frequency end on frequencies below 7.3 MHz, and the upper end on frequencies above 14.150 MHz
D. The upper frequency end on frequencies below 7.3 MHz, and the lower end on frequencies above 14.150 MHz
(B) FCC Rule: [97.301] G1A11 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
On which HF/MF bands is a General class license holder grantedall amateur frequency privileges?
A. 60 meters, 20 meters, 17 meters, and 12 meters
B. 160 meters, 80 meters, 40 meters, and 10 meters
C. 160 meters, 60 meters, 30 meters, 17 meters, 12 meters, and 10 meters
D. 160 meters, 30 meters, 17 meters, 15 meters, 12 meters, and 10 meters
FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A01 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
On which HF/MF bands is a General class license holder grantedall amateur frequency privileges?
A. 60 meters, 20 meters, 17 meters, and 12 meters
B. 160 meters, 80 meters, 40 meters, and 10 meters
C. 160 meters, 60 meters, 30 meters, 17 meters, 12 meters, and 10 meters
D. 160 meters, 30 meters, 17 meters, 15 meters, 12 meters, and 10 meters
(C) FCC Rule: [97.301(d)] G1A01 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
What portion of the 10-meter band is available for repeater use?
A. The entire band
B. The portion between 28.1 MHz and 28.2 MHz
C. The portion between 28.3 MHz and 28.5 MHz
D. The portion above 29.5 MHz
FCC Rule: [97.205(b)] G1A15 GCLM Page (3 - 9)
What portion of the 10-meter band is available for repeater use?
A. The entire band
B. The portion between 28.1 MHz and 28.2 MHz
C. The portion between 28.3 MHz and 28.5 MHz
D. The portion above 29.5 MHz
(D) FCC Rule: [97.205(b)] G1A15 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following amateur bands is restricted to communication only on specific channels, rather than
frequency ranges?
A. 11 meters
B. 12 meters
C. 30 meters
D. 60 meters
FCC Rule: [97.303 (h)] G1A04 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following amateur bands is restricted to communication only on specific channels, rather than
frequency ranges?
A. 11 meters
B. 12 meters
C. 30 meters
D. 60 meters
(D) FCC Rule: [97.303 (h)] G1A04 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
On which of the following bands is phone operation prohibited?
A. 160 meters
B. 30 meters
C. 17 meters
D. 12 meters
FCC Rule: [97.305] G1A02 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
On which of the following bands is phone operation prohibited?
A. 160 meters
B. 30 meters
C. 17 meters
D. 12 meters
(B) FCC Rule: [97.305] G1A02 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
On which of the following bands is image transmission prohibited?
A. 160 meters
B. 30 meters
C. 20 meters
D. 12 meters
FCC Rule: [97.305] G1A03 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
On which of the following bands is image transmission prohibited?
A. 160 meters
B. 30 meters
C. 20 meters
D. 12 meters
(B) FCC Rule: [97.305] G1A03 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following applies when the FCC rules designate the Amateur Service as a secondary user on a band?
A. Amateur stations must record the call sign of the primary service station before operating on a frequency assigned to that station
B. Amateur stations can use the band only during emergenciesC. Amateur stations can use the band only if they do not cause harmful interference to
primary usersD. Amateur stations may only operate during specific hours of the day, while primary
users are permitted 24- hour use of the bandFCC Rule: [97.303] G1A12 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following applies when the FCC rules designate the Amateur Service as a secondary user on a band?
A. Amateur stations must record the call sign of the primary service station before operating on a frequency assigned to that station
B. Amateur stations can use the band only during emergenciesC. Amateur stations can use the band only if they do not cause harmful interference to
primary usersD. Amateur stations may only operate during specific hours of the day, while primary
users are permitted 24- hour use of the band(C) FCC Rule: [97.303] G1A12 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
What is the appropriate action if, when operating on either the 30-meter or 60-meter bands, a station in the primary service
interferes with your contact?
A. Notify the FCCs regional Engineer in Charge of the interference
B. Increase your transmitter’s power to overcome the interference
C. Attempt to contact the station and request that it stop the interference
D. Move to a clear frequency or stop transmitting
FCC Rule: [97.303(h)(2)(j)] G1A13 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
What is the appropriate action if, when operating on either the 30-meter or 60-meter bands, a station in the primary service
interferes with your contact?
A. Notify the FCCs regional Engineer in Charge of the interference
B. Increase your transmitter’s power to overcome the interference
C. Attempt to contact the station and request that it stop the interference
D. Move to a clear frequency or stop transmitting
(D) FCC Rule: [97.303(h)(2)(j)] G1A13 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
In what part of the 13-centimeter band may an amateur station communicate with non-licensed Wi-Fi stations?
A. Anywhere in the band
B. Channels 1 through 4
C. Channels 42 through 45
D. No part
FCC Rule: [97.111] G1E07 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
In what part of the 13-centimeter band may an amateur station communicate with non-licensed Wi-Fi stations?
A. Anywhere in the band
B. Channels 1 through 4
C. Channels 42 through 45
D. No part
(D) FCC Rule: [97.111] G1E07 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
On what band do amateurs share channels with the unlicensed Wi-Fi service?
A. 432 MHz
B. 902 MHz
C. 2.4 GHz
D. 10.7 GHz
G8C01 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
On what band do amateurs share channels with the unlicensed Wi-Fi service?
A. 432 MHz
B. 902 MHz
C. 2.4 GHz
D. 10.7 GHz
(C) G8C01 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following conditions require a licensed Amateur Radio operator to take specific steps to avoid harmful
interference to other users or facilities?
A. When operating within one mile of an FCC Monitoring Station
B. When using a band where the Amateur Service is secondary
C. When a station is transmitting spread spectrum emissions
D. All these choices are correct
FCC Rule: [97.13(b),97.303, 97.311(b)] G1E04 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following conditions require a licensed Amateur Radio operator to take specific steps to avoid harmful
interference to other users or facilities?
A. When operating within one mile of an FCC Monitoring Station
B. When using a band where the Amateur Service is secondary
C. When a station is transmitting spread spectrum emissions
D. All these choices are correct
(D) FCC Rule: [97.13(b),97.303, 97.311(b)] G1E04 GCLM Page (3 - 8)
Which of the following is a purpose of a beacon station as identified in the FCC rules?
A. Observation of propagation and reception
B. Automatic identification of repeaters
C. Transmission of bulletins of general interest to Amateur Radio licensees
D. Identifying net frequencies
FCC Rule: [97.3(a)(9)] G1B03 GCLM Page (3 - 10)
Which of the following is a purpose of a beacon station as identified in the FCC rules?
A. Observation of propagation and reception
B. Automatic identification of repeaters
C. Transmission of bulletins of general interest to Amateur Radio licensees
D. Identifying net frequencies
(A) FCC Rule: [97.3(a)(9)] G1B03 GCLM Page (3 - 10)
With which of the following conditions must beacon stations comply?
A. A beacon station may not use automatic control
B. The frequency must be coordinated with the National Beacon Organization
C. The frequency must be posted on the internet or published in a national periodical
D. There must be no more than one beacon signal transmitting in the same band from the same station location
FCC Rule: [97.203(b)] G1B02 GCLM Page (3 - 10)
With which of the following conditions must beacon stations comply?
A. A beacon station may not use automatic control
B. The frequency must be coordinated with the National Beacon Organization
C. The frequency must be posted on the internet or published in a national periodical
D. There must be no more than one beacon signal transmitting in the same band from the same station location
(D) FCC Rule: [97.203(b)] G1B02 GCLM Page (3 - 10)
What is the power limit for beacon stations?
A. 10 watts PEP output
B. 20 watts PEP output
C. 100 watts PEP output
D. 200 watts PEP output
FCC Rule: [97.203(c)] G1B10 GCLM Page (3 - 10)
What is the power limit for beacon stations?
A. 10 watts PEP output
B. 20 watts PEP output
C. 100 watts PEP output
D. 200 watts PEP output
(C) FCC Rule: [97.203(c)] G1B10 GCLM Page (3 - 10)
On what HF frequencies are automatically controlled beacons permitted?
A. On any frequency if power is less than 1 watt
B. On any frequency if transmissions are in Morse code
C. 21.08 MHz to 21.09 MHz
D. 28.20 MHz to 28.30 MHz
FCC Rule: [97.203(d)] G1B09 GCLM Page (3 - 10)
On what HF frequencies are automatically controlled beacons permitted?
A. On any frequency if power is less than 1 watt
B. On any frequency if transmissions are in Morse code
C. 21.08 MHz to 21.09 MHz
D. 28.20 MHz to 28.30 MHz
(D) FCC Rule: [97.203(d)] G1B09 GCLM Page (3 - 10)
Why should an amateur operator normally avoid transmitting on 14.100, 18.110, 21.150, 24. 930 and 28.200 MHz?
A. A system of propagation beacon stations operates on those frequencies
B. A system of automatic digital stations operates on those frequencies
C. These frequencies are set aside for emergency operations
D. These frequencies are set aside for bulletins from the FCC
FCC Rule: [97.101] G1E10 GCLM Page (3 - 10)
Why should an amateur operator normally avoid transmitting on 14.100, 18.110, 21.150, 24. 930 and 28.200 MHz?
A. A system of propagation beacon stations operates on those frequencies
B. A system of automatic digital stations operates on those frequencies
C. These frequencies are set aside for emergency operations
D. These frequencies are set aside for bulletins from the FCC
(A) FCC Rule: [97.101] G1E10 GCLM Page (3 - 10)
THIRD-PARTY TRAFFIC
G1E01 — Which of the following would disqualify a third party from participating in stating a message over an amateur station? G1E05 — What types of messages for a third party in another country may be transmitted by an amateur station?
What types of messages for a third party in another country may be transmitted by an amateur station?
A. Any message, as long as the amateur operator is not paid
B. Only messages for other licensed amateurs
C. Only messages relating to Amateur Radio or remarks of a personal character, or messages relating to emergencies or disaster relief
D. Any messages, as long as the text of the message is recorded in the station log
FCC Rule: [97.115(a)(2),97.117] G1E05 GCLM Page (3 - 11)
What types of messages for a third party in another country may be transmitted by an amateur station?
A. Any message, as long as the amateur operator is not paid
B. Only messages for other licensed amateurs
C. Only messages relating to Amateur Radio or remarks of a personal character, or messages relating to emergencies or disaster relief
D. Any messages, as long as the text of the message is recorded in the station log
(C) FCC Rule: [97.115(a)(2),97.117] G1E05 GCLM Page (3 - 11)
Which of the following would disqualify a third party from participating in stating a message over an amateur station?
A. The third party’s amateur license has been revoked and not reinstated
B. The third party is not a U.S. citizen
C. The third party is a licensed amateur
D. The third party is speaking in a language other than English
FCC Rule: [97.115(b)(2)] G1E01 GCLM Page (3 - 11)
Which of the following would disqualify a third party from participating in stating a message over an amateur station?
A. The third party’s amateur license has been revoked and not reinstated
B. The third party is not a U.S. citizen
C. The third party is a licensed amateur
D. The third party is speaking in a language other than English
(A) FCC Rule: [97.115(b)(2)] G1E01 GCLM Page (3 - 11)
PROHIBITED AND RESTRICTED COMMUNICATIONS
G1B04 — Which of the following transmissions is permitted? G1B05 — Which of the following one-way transmissions are permitted? G1B07 — What are the restrictions on the use of abbreviations or procedural signals in the Amateur Service? G1B12 — When is it permissible to communicate with amateur stations in countries outside the areas administered by the
Federal Communications Commission? G1E02 — When may a 10-meter repeater retransmit the 2-meter signal from a station that has a Technician class control
operator?
Which of the following one-way transmissions are permitted?
A. Unidentified test transmissions of less than one minute in duration
B. Transmissions necessary to assist learning the International Morse code
C. Regular transmissions offering equipment for sale, if intended for Amateur Radio use
D. All these choices are correct
FCC Rule: [97.111((5)(b)] G1B05 GCLM Page (3 - 13)
Which of the following one-way transmissions are permitted?
A. Unidentified test transmissions of less than one minute in duration
B. Transmissions necessary to assist learning the International Morse code
C. Regular transmissions offering equipment for sale, if intended for Amateur Radio use
D. All these choices are correct
(B) FCC Rule: [97.111((5)(b)] G1B05 GCLM Page (3 - 13)
Which of the following transmissions is permitted?
A. Unidentified transmissions for test purposes only
B. Retransmission of other amateur station signals by any amateur station
C. Occasional retransmission of weather and propagation forecast information from U.S. government stations
D. Coded messages of any kind, if not intended to facilitate a criminal act
FCC Rule: [97.113(c)] G1B04 GCLM Page (3 - 13)
Which of the following transmissions is permitted?
A. Unidentified transmissions for test purposes only
B. Retransmission of other amateur station signals by any amateur station
C. Occasional retransmission of weather and propagation forecast information from U.S. government stations
D. Coded messages of any kind, if not intended to facilitate a criminal act
(C) FCC Rule: [97.113(c)] G1B04 GCLM Page (3 - 13)
When is it permissible to communicate with amateur stations in countries outside the areas administered by the Federal
Communications Commission?
A. Only when the foreign country has a formal third-party agreement filed with the FCCB. When the contact is with amateurs in any country except those whose
administrations have notified the ITU that they object to such communicationsC. When the contact is with amateurs in any country as long as the communication is
conducted in EnglishD. Only when the foreign country is a member of the International Amateur Radio UnionFCC Rule: [97.111(a)(1)] G1B12 GCLM Page (3 - 13)
When is it permissible to communicate with amateur stations in countries outside the areas administered by the Federal
Communications Commission?
A. Only when the foreign country has a formal third-party agreement filed with the FCCB. When the contact is with amateurs in any country except those whose
administrations have notified the ITU that they object to such communicationsC. When the contact is with amateurs in any country as long as the communication is
conducted in EnglishD. Only when the foreign country is a member of the International Amateur Radio Union(B) FCC Rule: [97.111(a)(1)] G1B12 GCLM Page (3 - 13)
What are the restrictions on the use of abbreviations or procedural signals in the Amateur Service?
A. Only “Q” signals are permitted
B. They may be used if they do not obscure the meaning of a message
C. They are not permitted
D. Only “10 codes” are permitted
FCC Rule: [97.113(a)(4)] G1B07 GCLM Page (3 - 13)
What are the restrictions on the use of abbreviations or procedural signals in the Amateur Service?
A. Only “Q” signals are permitted
B. They may be used if they do not obscure the meaning of a message
C. They are not permitted
D. Only “10 codes” are permitted
(B) FCC Rule: [97.113(a)(4)] G1B07 GCLM Page (3 - 13)
When may a 10-meter repeater retransmit the 2-meter signal from a station that has a Technician class control operator?
A. Under no circumstances
B. Only if the station on 10-meters is operating under a Special Temporary Authorization allowing such retransmission
C. Only during an FCC-declared general state of communications emergency
D. Only if the 10-meter repeater control operator holds at least a General class license
FCC Rule: [97.205(b)] G1E02 GCLM Page (3 - 13)
When may a 10-meter repeater retransmit the 2-meter signal from a station that has a Technician class control operator?
A. Under no circumstances
B. Only if the station on 10-meters is operating under a Special Temporary Authorization allowing such retransmission
C. Only during an FCC-declared general state of communications emergency
D. Only if the 10-meter repeater control operator holds at least a General class license
(D) FCC Rule: [97.205(b)] G1E02 GCLM Page (3 - 13)
3.4 Technical Rules and Standards
G1B11 — Who or what determines “good engineering and good amateur practice” as applied to the operation of an amateur station in all respects not covered by the Part 97 rules?
G1C01 — What is the maximum transmitting power an amateur station may use on 10.140 MHz? G1C02 — What is the maximum transmitting power an amateur station may use on the 12-meter band?G1C03 — What is the maximum bandwidth permitted by FCC rules for Amateur Radio stations transmitting on USB frequencies in
the 60-meter band? G1C04 — Which of the following limitations apply to transmitter power on every amateur band? G1C05 — Which of the following is a limitation on transmitter power on the 28 MHz band for a General Class control operator? G1C06 — Which of the following is a limitation on transmitter power on the 1.8 MHz band? G1C14 — What is the maximum power limit on the 60-meter band? G1C15 — What measurement is specified by FCC rules that regulate maximum power output? G1E08 — What is the maximum PEP output allowed for spread spectrum transmissions? G2D10 — What is QRP operation?
Who or what determines “good engineering and good amateur practice,” as applied to the operation of an amateur station in all
respects not covered by the Part 97 rules?
A. The FCC
B. The control operator
C. The IEEE
D. The ITU
FCC Rule: [97.101(a)] G1B11 GCLM Page (3 - 14)
Who or what determines “good engineering and good amateur practice,” as applied to the operation of an amateur station in all
respects not covered by the Part 97 rules?
A. The FCC
B. The control operator
C. The IEEE
D. The ITU
(A) FCC Rule: [97.101(a)] G1B11 GCLM Page (3 - 14)
What is the maximum transmitting power an amateur station may use on the 12-meter band?
A. 50 watts PEP output
B. 200 watts PEP output
C. 1500 watts PEP output
D. An effective radiated power equivalent to 100 watts from a half-wave dipole
FCC Rule: [97.313(a),(b)] G1C02 GCLM Page (3 - 14)
What is the maximum transmitting power an amateur station may use on the 12-meter band?
A. 50 watts PEP output
B. 200 watts PEP output
C. 1500 watts PEP output
D. An effective radiated power equivalent to 100 watts from a half-wave dipole
(C) FCC Rule: [97.313(a),(b)] G1C02 GCLM Page (3 - 14)
What is the limit for transmitter power on the 1.8 MHz band?
A. 200 watts PEP output
B. 1000 watts PEP output
C. 1200 watts PEP output
D. 1500 watts PEP output
FCC Rule: [97.313] G1C06 GCLM Page (3 - 14)
What is the limit for transmitter power on the 1.8 MHz band?
A. 200 watts PEP output
B. 1000 watts PEP output
C. 1200 watts PEP output
D. 1500 watts PEP output
(D) FCC Rule: [97.313] G1C06 GCLM Page (3 - 14)
What is QRP operation?
A. Remote piloted model control
B. Low-power transmit operation
C. Transmission using Quick Response Protocol
D. Traffic relay procedure net operation
G2D10 GCLM Page (3 - 14)
What is QRP operation?
A. Remote piloted model control
B. Low-power transmit operation
C. Transmission using Quick Response Protocol
D. Traffic relay procedure net operation
(B) G2D10 GCLM Page (3 - 14)
What measurement is specified by FCC rules that regulate maximum power output?
A. RMS
B. Average
C. Forward
D. PEP
FCC Rule: [97.313] G1C15 GCLM Page (3 - 14)
What measurement is specified by FCC rules that regulate maximum power output?
A. RMS
B. Average
C. Forward
D. PEP
(D) FCC Rule: [97.313] G1C15 GCLM Page (3 - 14)
What is the maximum transmitting power an amateur station may use on 10.140 MHz?
A. 200 watts PEP output
B. 1000 watts PEP output
C. 1500 watts PEP output
D. 2000 watts PEP output
FCC Rule: [97.313(c)(1)] G1C01 GCLM Page (3 - 15)
What is the maximum transmitting power an amateur station may use on 10.140 MHz?
A. 200 watts PEP output
B. 1000 watts PEP output
C. 1500 watts PEP output
D. 2000 watts PEP output
(A) FCC Rule: [97.313(c)(1)] G1C01 GCLM Page (3 - 15)
What is the maximum bandwidth permitted by FCC rules for Amateur Radio stations transmitting on USB frequencies in the
60-meter band?
A. 2.8 kHz
B. 5.6 kHz
C. 1.8 kHz
D. 3 kHz
FCC Rule: [97.303(h)(1)] G1C03 GCLM Page (3 - 15)
What is the maximum bandwidth permitted by FCC rules for Amateur Radio stations transmitting on USB frequencies in the
60-meter band?
A. 2.8 kHz
B. 5.6 kHz
C. 1.8 kHz
D. 3 kHz
(A) FCC Rule: [97.303(h)(1)] G1C03 GCLM Page (3 - 15)
What is the maximum power limit on the 60-meter band?
A. 1500 watts PEP
B. 10 watts RMS
C. ERP of 100 watts PEP with respect to a dipole
D. ERP of 100 watts PEP with respect to an isotropic antenna
FCC Rule: [97.313(i)] G1C14 GCLM Page (3 - 15)
What is the maximum power limit on the 60-meter band?
A. 1500 watts PEP
B. 10 watts RMS
C. ERP of 100 watts PEP with respect to a dipole
D. ERP of 100 watts PEP with respect to an isotropic antenna
(C) FCC Rule: [97.313(i)] G1C14 GCLM Page (3 - 15)
What is the limit for transmitter power on the 28 MHz band for a General Class control operator?
A. 100 watts PEP output
B. 1000 watts PEP output
C. 1500 watts PEP output
D. 2000 watts PEP output
FCC Rule: [97.313] G1C05 GCLM Page (3 - 15)
What is the limit for transmitter power on the 28 MHz band for a General Class control operator?
A. 100 watts PEP output
B. 1000 watts PEP output
C. 1500 watts PEP output
D. 2000 watts PEP output
(C) FCC Rule: [97.313] G1C05 GCLM Page (3 - 15)
What is the maximum PEP output allowed for spread spectrum transmissions?
A. 100 milliwatts
B. 10 watts
C. 100 watts
D. 1500 watts
FCC Rule: [97.313(j)] G1E08 GCLM Page (3 - 15)
What is the maximum PEP output allowed for spread spectrum transmissions?
A. 100 milliwatts
B. 10 watts
C. 100 watts
D. 1500 watts
(B) FCC Rule: [97.313(j)] G1E08 GCLM Page (3 - 15)
Which of the following limitations apply to transmitter power on every amateur band?
A. Only the minimum power necessary to carry out the desired communications should be used
B. Power must be limited to 200 watts when using data transmissions
C. Power should be limited as necessary to avoid interference to another radio service on the frequency
D. Effective radiated power cannot exceed 1500 watts
FCC Rule: [97.313(a)] G1C04 GCLM Page (3 - 15)
Which of the following limitations apply to transmitter power on every amateur band?
A. Only the minimum power necessary to carry out the desired communications should be used
B. Power must be limited to 200 watts when using data transmissions
C. Power should be limited as necessary to avoid interference to another radio service on the frequency
D. Effective radiated power cannot exceed 1500 watts
(A) FCC Rule: [97.313(a)] G1C04 GCLM Page (3 - 15)
DIGITAL TRANSMISSIONS
G1C07 — What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmission on the 20-meter band? G1C08 — What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmitted at frequencies below 28 MHz? G1C09 — What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmitted on the 1.25-meter and 70-
centimeter bands? G1C10 — What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmissions on the 10-meter band? G1C11 — What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmissions on the 2-meter band? G1C13 — What must be done before using a new digital protocol on the air?
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmission on the 20-meter band?
A. 56 kilobaud
B. 19.6 kilobaud
C. 1200 baud
D. 300 baud
FCC Rule: [97.305(c), 97.307(f)(3)] G1C07 GCLM Page (3 - 16)
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmission on the 20-meter band?
A. 56 kilobaud
B. 19.6 kilobaud
C. 1200 baud
D. 300 baud
(D) FCC Rule: [97.305(c), 97.307(f)(3)] G1C07 GCLM Page (3 - 16)
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmitted at frequencies below 28 MHz?
A. 56 kilobaud
B. 19.6 kilobaud
C. 1200 baud
D. 300 baud
FCC Rule: [97.307(f)(3)] G1C08 GCLM Page (3 - 16)
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmitted at frequencies below 28 MHz?
A. 56 kilobaud
B. 19.6 kilobaud
C. 1200 baud
D. 300 baud
(D) FCC Rule: [97.307(f)(3)] G1C08 GCLM Page (3 - 16)
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmitted on the 1.25-meter and 70-centimeter
bands?
A. 56 kilobaud
B. 19.6 kilobaud
C. 1200 baud
D. 300 baud
FCC Rule: [97.305(c), 97.307(f)(5)] G1C09 GCLM Page (3 - 16)
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmitted on the 1.25-meter and 70-centimeter
bands?
A. 56 kilobaud
B. 19.6 kilobaud
C. 1200 baud
D. 300 baud
(A) FCC Rule: [97.305(c), 97.307(f)(5)] G1C09 GCLM Page (3 - 16)
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmissions on the 10-meter band?
A. 56 kilobaud
B. 19.6 kilobaud
C. 1200 baud
D. 300 baud
FCC Rule: [97.305(c), 97.307(f)(4)] G1C10 GCLM Page (3 - 16)
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmissions on the 10-meter band?
A. 56 kilobaud
B. 19.6 kilobaud
C. 1200 baud
D. 300 baud
(C) FCC Rule: [97.305(c), 97.307(f)(4)] G1C10 GCLM Page (3 - 16)
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmissions on the 2-meter band?
A. 56 kilobaud
B. 19.6 kilobaud
C. 1200 baud
D. 300 baud
FCC Rule: [97.305(c), 97.307(f)(5)] G1C11 GCLM Page (3 - 16)
What is the maximum symbol rate permitted for RTTY or data emission transmissions on the 2-meter band?
A. 56 kilobaud
B. 19.6 kilobaud
C. 1200 baud
D. 300 baud
(B) FCC Rule: [97.305(c), 97.307(f)(5)] G1C11 GCLM Page (3 - 16)
What must be done before using a new digital protocol on the air?
A. Type-certify equipment to FCC standards
B. Obtain an experimental license from the FCC
C. Publicly document the technical characteristics of the protocol
D. Submit a rule-making proposal to the FCC describing the codes and methods of the technique
FCC Rule: [97.309(a)(4)] G1C13 GCLM Page (3 - 16)
What must be done before using a new digital protocol on the air?
A. Type-certify equipment to FCC standards
B. Obtain an experimental license from the FCC
C. Publicly document the technical characteristics of the protocol
D. Submit a rule-making proposal to the FCC describing the codes and methods of the technique
(C) FCC Rule: [97.309(a)(4)] G1C13 GCLM Page (3 - 16)
Course Overview
IntroductionProcedures and Practices
Rules and RegulationsComponents and Circuits
Radio Signals and EquipmentDigital Modes
AntennasPropagation
Electrical and RF Safety
G5B01 — What dB change represents a factor of two increase or decrease in power? G5B03 — How many watts of electrical power are used if 400 VDC is supplied to an 800 ohm
load? G5B04 — How many watts of electrical power are used by a 12 VDC light bulb that draws 0.2
amperes? G5B05 — How many watts are dissipated when a current of 7.0 milliamperes flows through a
1250 ohm resistance? G5B10 — What percentage of power loss would result from a transmission line loss of 1 dB?
4.1 Power and Decibels
𝐸 = 𝐼 𝑥 𝑅
𝐼 = 𝐸𝑅
𝑅 = 𝐸𝐼
𝑃 = 𝐼 𝑥 𝐸
𝐼 = 𝑃𝐸
E = 𝑃
𝐼
𝑃 = 𝐼 𝑥 (𝐼 𝑥 𝑅)= 𝐼2 𝑥 𝑅 𝑃 = 𝐸𝑅𝑥 𝐸 = 𝐸2
𝑅
(E) (I)
To find out how many watts of electrical power are used if 400 V dc is supplied to an 800 Ω resistor:
P = 𝐸2
𝑅= 400
2
800= 160,000
800= 200 Watts [G5B03]
To find out how many watts of electrical power are used by a 12 V dc light bulb that draws 0.2 A:
𝑃 = 𝐼 𝑥 𝐸 = 0.2 𝑥 12 = 2.4 𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑠 [G5B04]
To find out how many watts are being dissipated when a current of 7.0 mA of current flows through a 1.25 kΩ resistor:
𝑃 = 𝐼2 𝑥 𝑅 = 0.007 𝑥 0.007 𝑥 1250 = 0.06125𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑠 = 61.25 𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑙𝑖𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑠
[G5B05]
A very useful value to remember is that any time you double the power (or cut it in half), there is a 3 dB change.] A two-times increase (or decrease) in power results in a gain (or loss) of:
𝑑𝐵 = 10 𝑥 𝑙𝑜𝑔1021 = 10 𝑥 𝑙𝑜𝑔10 2 = 10 𝑥 0.3 = 3 𝑑𝐵
[G5B01With respect to dB:
3 dB = 2 times Power
6 dB = 4 times Power (+ or -)
10 dB = 10 times Power
Remember, Watts = Power
Converting dB to Percentage and Vice VersaHere’s a practical application. Suppose you are using an antenna feed line that has a loss of 1 dB. You can calculate the amount of transmitter power that’s actually reaching your antenna and how much is lost in the feed line.
𝑷𝒆𝒓𝒄𝒆𝒏𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆 𝒐𝒇 𝑷𝒐𝒘𝒆𝒓 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎% 𝒙 𝒍𝒐𝒈−𝟏(𝒅𝑩𝟏𝟎)
𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 = 100% 𝑥 𝑙𝑜𝑔−1 −110 = 100 𝑥 𝑙𝑜𝑔−1 −0.1 = 79.4%
100 − 79.4 = 20.6%[G5B10]
How many watts of electrical power are used if 400 VDC is supplied to an 800 ohm load?
A. 0.5 watts
B. 200 watts
C. 400 watts
D. 3200 watts
G5B03 GCLM Page (4 - 1)
𝑃 = 𝐸2
𝑅= 400 𝑥 400
800= 160,000
800
How many watts of electrical power are used if 400 VDC is supplied to an 800 ohm load?
A. 0.5 watts
B. 200 watts
C. 400 watts
D. 3200 watts
(B) G5B03 GCLM Page (4 - 1)
𝑃 = 𝐸2
𝑅= 400 𝑥 400
800= 160,000
800= 200𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑠
How many watts of electrical power are used by a 12 VDC light bulb that draws 0.2 amperes?
A. 2.4 watts
B. 24 watts
C. 6 watts
D. 60 watts
G5B04 GCLM Page (4 - 2)
𝑃 = 𝐸 𝑥 𝐼 = 12 𝑥 0.2
How many watts of electrical power are used by a 12 VDC light bulb that draws 0.2 amperes?
A. 2.4 watts
B. 24 watts
C. 6 watts
D. 60 watts
(A) G5B04 GCLM Page (4 - 2)
𝑃 = 𝐸 𝑥 𝐼 = 12 𝑥 0.2 = 2.4 𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑠
How many watts are dissipated when a current of 7.0 milliamperes flows through a 1250 ohm resistance?
A. Approximately 61 milliwatts
B. Approximately 61 watts
C. Approximately 11 milliwatts
D. Approximately 11 watts
G5B05 GCLM Page (4 - 2)
𝑃 = 𝐼2 𝑥 𝑅 = 0.007 𝑥 0.007 𝑥 1250
How many watts are dissipated when a current of 7.0 milliamperes flows through a 1250 ohm resistance?
A. Approximately 61 milliwatts
B. Approximately 61 watts
C. Approximately 11 milliwatts
D. Approximately 11 watts
(A) G5B05 GCLM Page (4 - 2)
𝑃 = 𝐼2 𝑥 𝑅 = 0.007 𝑥 0.007 𝑥 1250 = 0.06125𝑊 = 61.25 𝑚𝑊
What dB change represents a factor of two increase or decrease in power?
A. Approximately 2 dB
B. Approximately 3 dB
C. Approximately 6 dB
D. Approximately 12 dB
G5B01 GCLM Page (4 - 2)
𝑑𝐵 = 10 𝑙𝑜𝑔1021= 10 𝑙𝑜𝑔10 2 = 10 x (0.3)
What dB change represents a factor of two increase or decrease in power?
A. Approximately 2 dB
B. Approximately 3 dB
C. Approximately 6 dB
D. Approximately 12 dB
(B) G5B01 GCLM Page (4 - 2)
𝑑𝐵 = 10 𝑙𝑜𝑔1021= 10 𝑙𝑜𝑔10 2 = 10 x 0.3 = 3 𝑑𝐵
What percentage of power loss would result from a transmission line loss of 1 dB?
A. 10.9 percent
B. 12.2 percent
C. 20.6 percent
D. 25.9 percent
G5B10 GCLM Page (4 - 3)
𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 = 100% 𝑥 𝑙𝑜𝑔−1 −110
= 100 𝑥 𝑙𝑜𝑔−1 (−0.1)
What percentage of power loss would result from a transmission line loss of 1 dB?
A. 10.9 percent
B. 12.2 percent
C. 20.6 percent
D. 25.9 percent
(C) G5B10 GCLM Page (4 - 3)
𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 = 100% 𝑥 𝑙𝑜𝑔−1 −110 = 100 𝑥 𝑙𝑜𝑔−1(−0.1) = 79.4%
100 − 79.4 = 20.6%
G5B06 — What is the output PEP from a transmitter if an oscilloscope measures 200 volts peak-to-peak across a 50 ohm dummy load connected to the transmitter output?
G5B07 — What value of an AC signal produces the same power dissipation in a resistor as a DC voltage of the same value?
G5B08 — What is the peak-to-peak voltage of a sine wave with an RMS voltage of 120.0 volts? G5B09 — What is the RMS voltage of a sine wave with a value of 17 volts peak? G5B11 — What is the ratio of peak envelope power to average power for an unmodulated
carrier? G5B12 — What would be the RMS voltage across a 50 ohm dummy load dissipating 1200 watts? G5B13 — What is the output PEP of an unmodulated carrier if an average reading wattmeter
connected to the transmitter output indicates 1060 watts? G5B14 — What is the output PEP from a transmitter if an oscilloscope measures 500volts peak-
to-peak across a 50 ohm resistive load connected to the transmitter output?
4.2 AC Power
RMS: DEFINITION AND MEASUREMENT
As ac electrical power became common, it was important to know how much ac voltage delivered
the same average power compared to a dc voltage.
The power equation is quite clear for dc: 𝑷 = 𝑬𝟐
𝑹.
But, what value for E is used for ac power? The peak voltage, an average, or what? The answer
turns out to be the root mean square (RMS) voltage (often abbreviated 𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆). If RMS voltage is
used in ac equations for calculating power, the result for the ac signal is the same as for an
unvarying dc voltage.1
“Root mean square” refers to the method used to calculate RMS voltage. It is the square root of
the average (mean) of the squares of the values of the signal instantaneous voltages that are
present.1
AC Power (Alternating Current)
1Silver, N0AX, Ward. "AC Power". General Class License Manual. Ed. . Ninth Edition ed. Newington: American Radio Relay League, 2019. 4-5.
The RMS value for a sine wave is simply 0.707 times the sine wave’s peak voltage, 𝑉𝑃𝐾, as shown in this figure.
Frequency (Hz)
Circular Frequency
Omega, ω=2πf (rad/s) Amplitude Delta t Time (Sec) Sine Wave Function Squares
1 6.28319 1 0.005 0 0 0
0.005 0.031410783
0.01 0.062790566
0.015 0.094108383
0.02 0.125333327
0.025 0.156434581
0.03 0.187381453
0.035 0.218143402
0.04 0.248690069
0.045 0.278991309
0.05 0.309017218 0.095491641
0.055 0.338738163
0.06 0.368124814
0.065 0.397148171
0.07 0.425779589
0.075 0.453990813
0.08 0.481754003
0.085 0.509041759
0.09 0.535827152
0.095 0.562083747
0.1 0.587785632 0.345491949
0.105 0.612907443
0.11 0.637424387
0.115 0.66131227
0.12 0.684547516
0.125 0.707107196
0.13 0.728969045
0.135 0.750111489
0.14 0.770513662
0.145 0.790155429
0.15 0.809017408 0.654509167
0.155 0.827080983
0.16 0.844328328
0.165 0.860742421
0.17 0.876307064 Sum of the Squares =5.00 Mean = 0.5 Square Root of the Mean = 0.707107
0.175 0.891006897
0.309017218
0.587785632
0.707107196
0.809017408
0.951056806
1
0.951056081
0.809016029
0.587783734
0.309014986
-1.5
-1
-0.5
0
0.5
1
1.5
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1Vo
lta
ge
Frequency
1 Hz Sine Wave
𝑉𝑃𝐾 𝑉𝑃−𝑃
.707
𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆
PEP: DEFINITION AND MEASUREMENT
PEP (or peak envelope power) is the average power of one complete RF cycle of the signal’s
envelope. (It is not the instantaneous power at the peak of an RF cycle during a peak of the signal’s
envelope.) PEP is used because it is a convenient way to measure or specify the maximum power
of amplitude modulated signals.
To calculate average ac power, you need to know the load impedance and the RMS voltage.
Measure the RF voltage at the very peak of the modulated signal’s envelope. This is the peak
envelope voltage (PEV). PEV is equal to one-half of the waveform’s peak-to-peak voltage 𝑉𝑃−𝑃.
PEP is the calculated as follows:2
𝑃𝐸𝑃 = (𝑃𝐸𝑉𝑥0.707)2
𝑅𝐿= 𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆
2
𝑅𝐿
2Silver, N0AX, Ward. "AC Power". General Class License Manual. Ed. . Ninth Edition ed. Newington: American Radio Relay League, 2019. 4-6.
The Test Setup
Koolertron
DDS Signal
Generator/Counter
Rigol 1054Z 50 MHz
Digital Oscilloscope
Elecraft KX3 QRP
Transceiver
Homebrew
Sampling Box
Vertical
Amplifier Input
Complex
Waveform
1000 Hz Tone
Output to
Microphone
Input of
Transceiver50 Ω Dummy Load
(𝑅𝐿)
LAB
16.4 PEV
34 V P-P
Unmodulated Carrier
Meter Reads 3 Watts
2.6887877 Watts From Calculations
2.68878774 0. 0 16.4 𝑃𝐸 2
0PEP= 𝐸𝑅𝑀𝑆
2
𝑅𝐿
LAB
Unmodulated Carrier (Expanded)
16.4 PEV
0
-16.4 PEV
33.6V P-P
PEP is equal to the average power if an amplitude-
modulated signal is not modulated. [G5B11] This is the case
when modulation is removed from an AM signal (leaving only
the steady carrier) or when a CW transmitter is keyed.
Likewise, an FM signal is a constant-power signal, so PEP is
always equal to average power for FM signals. If an average-
reading wattmeter connected to your transmitter reads 1060
W when you close the key on CW, your PEP output is also
1060 W. [G5B13] 3
3Silver, N0AX, Ward. "AC Power". General Class License Manual. Ed. . Ninth Edition ed. Newington: American Radio Relay League, 2019. 4-7.
LAB
33.6 V PEV
69.2 V P-P
100% 1000 Hz Modulation
Meter Reads 10 Watts
11.286191 Watts From Calculations
PEP= 𝐸𝑅𝑀𝑆2
𝑅𝐿11.286191
0. 0 .6 𝑃𝐸 2
0
200 mV PEV
400 mV P-P
LAB
• The attenuated RF output of the transmitter is the signal source that is connected to the vertical input of an oscilloscope when checking the RF envelope pattern of a transmitted signal. (G4B04)
• One advantage of an oscilloscope versus a digital voltmeter is that complex waveforms can be measured. (G4B02)
LAB
What value of an AC signal produces the same power dissipation in a resistor as a DC voltage of the same value?
A. The peak-to-peak value
B. The peak value
C. The RMS value
D. The reciprocal of the RMS value
G5B07 GCLM Page (4 - 5)
What value of an AC signal produces the same power dissipation in a resistor as a DC voltage of the same value?
A. The peak-to-peak value
B. The peak value
C. The RMS value
D. The reciprocal of the RMS value
(C) G5B07 GCLM Page (4 - 5)
The RMS Value
What is the RMS voltage of a sine wave with a value of 17 volts peak?
A. 8.5 volts
B. 12 volts
C. 24 volts
D. 34 volts
G5B09 GCLM Page (4 - 5)
𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 = 0.707 𝑥 17
What is the RMS voltage of a sine wave with a value of 17 volts peak?
A. 8.5 volts
B. 12 volts
C. 24 volts
D. 34 volts
(B) G5B09 GCLM Page (4 - 5)
𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 = 0.707 𝑥 17 = 12 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠
What is the peak-to-peak voltage of a sine wave with an RMS voltage of 120.0 volts?
A. 84.8 volts
B. 169.7 volts
C. 240.0 volts
D. 339.4 volts
G5B08 GCLM Page (4 - 6)
𝑉𝑃−𝑃 = 2 x 1.414 x 120 = 2.828 x 120
What is the peak-to-peak voltage of a sine wave with an RMS voltage of 120.0 volts?
A. 84.8 volts
B. 169.7 volts
C. 240.0 volts
D. 339.4 volts
(D) G5B08 GCLM Page (4 - 6)
𝑉𝑃−𝑃 = 2 x 1.414 x 120 = 2.828 x 120 = 339.4 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠
What would be the RMS voltage across a 50 ohm dummy load dissipating 1200 watts?
A. 173 volts
B. 245 volts
C. 346 volts
D. 692 volts
G5B12 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 = 𝑃𝐸𝑃 𝑥 𝑅 = 1200 𝑥 50
What would be the RMS voltage across a 50 ohm dummy load dissipating 1200 watts?
A. 173 volts
B. 245 volts
C. 346 volts
D. 692 volts
(B) G5B12 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
𝑉𝑅𝑀𝑆 = 𝑃𝐸𝑃 𝑥 𝑅 = 1200 𝑥 50 = 245 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠
What is the output PEP from a transmitter if an oscilloscope measures 200 volts peak-to-peak across a 50 ohm dummy load
connected to the transmitter output?
A. 1.4 watts
B. 100 watts
C. 353.5 watts
D. 400 watts
G5B06 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
𝑃𝐸𝑃 =0.707 𝑥 200
22
50= 4999
50
What is the output PEP from a transmitter if an oscilloscope measures 200 volts peak-to-peak across a 50 ohm dummy load
connected to the transmitter output?
A. 1.4 watts
B. 100 watts
C. 353.5 watts
D. 400 watts
(B) G5B06 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
𝑃𝐸𝑃 =0.707 𝑥 200
22
50= 4999
50= 100𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑠
What is the output PEP from a transmitter if an oscilloscope measures 500 volts peak-to-peak across a 50 ohm resistive load
connected to the transmitter output?
A. 8.75 watts
B. 625 watts
C. 2500 watts
D. 5000 watts
G5B14 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
𝑃𝐸𝑃 =0.707 𝑥 500
22
50= 31241
50
What is the output PEP from a transmitter if an oscilloscope measures 500 volts peak-to-peak across a 50 ohm resistive load
connected to the transmitter output?
A. 8.75 watts
B. 625 watts
C. 2500 watts
D. 5000 watts
(B) G5B14 GCLM Page (4 - 6)
𝑃𝐸𝑃 =0.707 𝑥 500
22
50= 31241
50= 625𝑊𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑠
What is the ratio of peak envelope power to average power for an unmodulated carrier?
A. 0.707
B. 1.00
C. 1.414
D. 2.00
G5B11 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
What is the ratio of peak envelope power to average power for an unmodulated carrier?
A. 0.707
B. 1.00
C. 1.414
D. 2.00
(B) G5B11 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
1:1 Ratio – An Unmodulated Carrier is the Average Power
What is the output PEP of an unmodulated carrier if an average reading wattmeter connected to the transmitter output
indicates 1060 watts?
A. 530 watts
B. 1060 watts
C. 1500 watts
D. 2120 watts
G5B13 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
What is the output PEP of an unmodulated carrier if an average reading wattmeter connected to the transmitter output
indicates 1060 watts?
A. 530 watts
B. 1060 watts
C. 1500 watts
D. 2120 watts
(B) G5B13 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
Remember: An Unmodulated Carrier is the PEP/Average Power.
4.3 Basic Components
G7A09 — Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a field effect transistor? G7A10 — Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a Zener diode? G7A11 — Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents an NPN junction transistor? G7A12 — Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a solid core transformer? G7A13 — Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a tapped inductor?
(1) Field Effect Transistor [G7A09]
(6) Solid Core Transformer [G7A12]
(2) NPN Junction Transistor [G7A11]
(5) Zener Diode [G7A10]
(7) Tapped Inductor [G7A13]
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents a field effect transistor?
A. Symbol 2
B. Symbol 5
C. Symbol 1
D. Symbol 4
G7A09 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents a field effect transistor?
A. Symbol 2
B. Symbol 5
C. Symbol 1
D. Symbol 4
(C) G7A09 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents a Zener diode?
A. Symbol 4
B. Symbol 1
C. Symbol 11
D. Symbol 5
G7A10 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents a Zener diode?
A. Symbol 4
B. Symbol 1
C. Symbol 11
D. Symbol 5
(D) G7A10 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents an NPN junction transistor?
A. Symbol 1
B. Symbol 2
C. Symbol 7
D. Symbol 11
G7A11 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
Which symbol in figure G7-1 represents an NPN junction transistor?
A. Symbol 1
B. Symbol 2
C. Symbol 7
D. Symbol 11
(B) G7A11 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a solid core transformer?
A. Symbol 4
B. Symbol 7
C. Symbol 6
D. Symbol 1
G7A12 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a solid core transformer?
A. Symbol 4
B. Symbol 7
C. Symbol 6
D. Symbol 1
(C) G7A12 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a tapped inductor?
A. Symbol 7
B. Symbol 11
C. Symbol 6
D. Symbol 1
G7A13 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
Which symbol in Figure G7-1 represents a tapped inductor?
A. Symbol 7
B. Symbol 11
C. Symbol 6
D. Symbol 1
(A) G7A13 GCLM Page (4 - 7)
INDUCTORS AND INDUCTANCE G6A08 — What is an advantage of using a ferrite core toroidal inductor? G6B01 — What determines the performance of a ferrite core at different frequencies?
CAPACITORS AND CAPACITANCE G5C17 — What is the value in nanofarads (nF) of a 22,000 picofarad (pF) capacitor? G5C18 — What is the value in microfarads of a 4700 nanofarad (nF) capacitor? G6A04 — Which of the following is an advantage of an electrolytic capacitor? G6A13 — Why is the polarity of applied voltages important for polarized capacitors? G6A14 — Which of the following is an advantage of ceramic capacitors as compared to other
types of capacitors?
.
What is an advantage of using a ferrite core toroidal inductor?
A. Large values of inductance may be obtained
B. The magnetic properties of the core may be optimized for a specific range of frequencies
C. Most of the magnetic field is contained in the core
D. All these choices are correct
G6A08 GCLM Page (4 - 11)
What is an advantage of using a ferrite core toroidal inductor?
A. Large values of inductance may be obtained
B. The magnetic properties of the core may be optimized for a specific range of frequencies
C. Most of the magnetic field is contained in the core
D. All these choices are correct
(D) G6A08 GCLM Page (4 - 11)
What determines the performance of a ferrite core at different frequencies?
A. Its conductivity
B. Its thickness
C. The composition, or “mix,” of materials used
D. The ratio of outer diameter to inner diameter
G6B01 GCLM Page (4 - 12)
What determines the performance of a ferrite core at different frequencies?
A. Its conductivity
B. Its thickness
C. The composition, or “mix,” of materials used
D. The ratio of outer diameter to inner diameter
(C) G6B01 GCLM Page (4 - 12)
Which of the following is an advantage of an electrolytic capacitor?
A. Tight tolerance
B. Much less leakage than any other type
C. High capacitance for a given volume
D. Inexpensive RF capacitor
G6A04 GCLM Page (4 - 12)
Which of the following is an advantage of an electrolytic capacitor?
A. Tight tolerance
B. Much less leakage than any other type
C. High capacitance for a given volume
D. Inexpensive RF capacitor
(C) G6A04 GCLM Page (4 - 12)
Why is the polarity of applied voltages important for polarized capacitors?
A. Incorrect polarity can cause the capacitor to short-circuit
B. Reverse voltages can destroy the dielectric layer of an electrolytic capacitor
C. The capacitor could overheat and explode
D. All these choices are correct
G6A13 GCLM Page (4 - 12)
Why is the polarity of applied voltages important for polarized capacitors?
A. Incorrect polarity can cause the capacitor to short-circuit
B. Reverse voltages can destroy the dielectric layer of an electrolytic capacitor
C. The capacitor could overheat and explode
D. All these choices are correct
(D) G6A13 GCLM Page (4 - 12)
Which of the following is an advantage of ceramic capacitors as compared to other types of capacitors?
A. Tight tolerance
B. High stability
C. High capacitance for given volume
D. Comparatively low cost
G6A14 GCLM Page (4 - 13)
Which of the following is an advantage of ceramic capacitors as compared to other types of capacitors?
A. Tight tolerance
B. High stability
C. High capacitance for given volume
D. Comparatively low cost
(D) G6A14 GCLM Page (4 - 13)
What is the value in nanofarads (nF) of a 22,000 picofarad (pF) capacitor?
A. 0.22
B. 2.2
C. 22
D. 220
G5C17 GCLM Page (4 - 13)
From picofarads To nanofarads divide by 1000
22,000 ÷ 1000
What is the value in nanofarads (nF) of a 22,000 picofarad (pF) capacitor?
A. 0.22
B. 2.2
C. 22
D. 220
(C) G5C17 GCLM Page (4 - 13)
22,000 ÷ 1000 = 22
From picofarads To nanofarads divide by 1000
What is the value in microfarads of a 4700 nanofarad (nF) capacitor?
A. 47
B. 0.47
C. 47,000
D. 4.7
G5C18 GCLM Page (4 - 13)
From nanofarads To microfarads divide by 1000
4,700 ÷ 1000
What is the value in microfarads of a 4700 nanofarad (nF) capacitor?
A. 47
B. 0.47
C. 47,000
D. 4.7
(D) G5C18 GCLM Page (4 - 13)
From nanofarads To microfarads divide by 1000
4,700 ÷ 1000 = 4.7
TRANSFORMERS G5C01 — What causes a voltage to appear across the secondary winding of a transformer when
an AC voltage source is connected across its primary winding? G5C02 — What happens if a signal is applied to the secondary winding of a 4:1 voltage step-
down transformer instead of the primary winding? G5C06 — What is the RMS voltage across a 500-turn secondary winding in a transformer if the
2250-turn primary is connected to 120 VAC? G5C16 — Why is the conductor of the primary winding of many voltage step-up transformers
larger in diameter than the conductor of the secondary winding?
What causes a voltage to appear across the secondary winding of a transformer when an AC voltage source is connected across
its primary winding?
A. Capacitive coupling
B. Displacement current coupling
C. Mutual inductance
D. Mutual capacitance
G5C01 GCLM Page (4 - 13)
What causes a voltage to appear across the secondary winding of a transformer when an AC voltage source is connected across
its primary winding?
A. Capacitive coupling
B. Displacement current coupling
C. Mutual inductance
D. Mutual capacitance
(C) G5C01 GCLM Page (4 - 13)
Why is the conductor of the primary winding of many voltage step-up transformers larger in diameter than the conductor of
the secondary winding?
A. To improve the coupling between the primary and secondary
B. To accommodate the higher current of the primary
C. To prevent parasitic oscillations due to resistive losses in the primary
D. To ensure that the volume of the primary winding is equal to the volume of the secondary winding
G5C16 GCLM Page (4 - 14)
Why is the conductor of the primary winding of many voltage step-up transformers larger in diameter than the conductor of
the secondary winding?
A. To improve the coupling between the primary and secondary
B. To accommodate the higher current of the primary
C. To prevent parasitic oscillations due to resistive losses in the primary
D. To ensure that the volume of the primary winding is equal to the volume of the secondary winding
(B) G5C16 GCLM Page (4 - 14)
What is the RMS voltage across a 500-turn secondary winding in a transformer if the 2250-turn primary is connected to 120 VAC?
A. 2370 volts
B. 540 volts
C. 26.7 volts
D. 5.9 volts
G5C06 GCLM Page (4 - 14)
𝐸𝑆 = 𝐸𝑃 𝑥𝑁𝑆𝑁𝑃= 120 𝑥 500
2250
What is the RMS voltage across a 500-turn secondary winding in a transformer if the 2250-turn primary is connected to 120 VAC?
A. 2370 volts
B. 540 volts
C. 26.7 volts
D. 5.9 volts
(C) G5C06 GCLM Page (4 - 14)
𝐸𝑆 = 𝐸𝑃 𝑥𝑁𝑆𝑁𝑃= 120 𝑥 500
2250= 26.7 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠
What happens if a signal is applied to the secondary winding of a 4:1 voltage step-down transformer instead of the
primary winding?
A. The output voltage is multiplied by 4
B. The output voltage is divided by 4
C. Additional resistance must be added in series with the primary to prevent overload
D. Additional resistance must be added in parallel with the secondary to prevent overload
G5C02 GCLM Page (4 - 14)
What happens if a signal is applied to the secondary winding of a 4:1 voltage step-down transformer instead of the
primary winding?
A. The output voltage is multiplied by 4
B. The output voltage is divided by 4
C. Additional resistance must be added in series with the primary to prevent overload
D. Additional resistance must be added in parallel with the secondary to prevent overload
(A) G5C02 GCLM Page (4 - 14)
It would now be a Step-up Transformer.
COMPONENTS IN SERIES AND PARALLEL CIRCUITS G5B02 — How does the total current relate to the individual currents in each branch of a purely resistive parallel
circuit? G5C03 — Which of the following components increases the total resistance of a resistor? G5C04 — What is the total resistance of three 100 ohm resistors in parallel? G5C05 — If three equal value resistors in series produce 450 ohms, what is the value of each resistor? G5C08 — What is the equivalent capacitance of two 5.0 nanofarad capacitors and one 750 picofarad capacitor
connected in parallel? G5C09 — What is the capacitance of three 100 microfarad capacitors connected in series? G5C10 — What is the inductance of three 10 millihenry inductors connected in parallel? G5C11 — What is the inductance of a 20 millihenry inductor connected in series with a 50 millihenry inductor? G5C12 — What is the capacitance of a 20 microfarad capacitor connected in series with a 50 microfarad capacitor? G5C13 — Which of the following components should be added to a capacitor to increase the capacitance? G5C14 — Which of the following components should be added to an inductor to increase the inductance? G5C15 — What is the total resistance of a 10 ohm, a 20 ohm, and a 50 ohm resistor connected in parallel?
How does the total current relate to the individual currents in each branch of a purely resistive parallel circuit?
A. It equals the average of each branch current
B. It decreases as more parallel branches are added to the circuit
C. It equals the sum of the currents through each branch
D. It is the sum of the reciprocal of each individual voltage drop
G5B02 GCLM Page (4 - 15)
How does the total current relate to the individual currents in each branch of a purely resistive parallel circuit?
A. It equals the average of each branch current
B. It decreases as more parallel branches are added to the circuit
C. It equals the sum of the currents through each branch
D. It is the sum of the reciprocal of each individual voltage drop
(C) G5B02 GCLM Page (4 - 15)
Which of the following components increases the total resistance of a resistor?
A. A parallel resistor
B. A series resistor
C. A series capacitor
D. A parallel capacitor
G5C03 GCLM Page (4 - 15)
Which of the following components increases the total resistance of a resistor?
A. A parallel resistor
B. A series resistor
C. A series capacitor
D. A parallel capacitor
(B) G5C03 GCLM Page (4 - 15)
Which of the following components should be added to a capacitor to increase the capacitance?
A. An inductor in series
B. A resistor in series
C. A capacitor in parallel
D. A capacitor in series
G5C13 GCLM Page (4 - 15)
Which of the following components should be added to a capacitor to increase the capacitance?
A. An inductor in series
B. A resistor in series
C. A capacitor in parallel
D. A capacitor in series
(C) G5C13 GCLM Page (4 - 15)
Which of the following components should be added to an inductor to increase the inductance?
A. A capacitor in series
B. A resistor in parallel
C. An inductor in parallel
D. An inductor in series
G5C14 GCLM Page (4 - 15)
Which of the following components should be added to an inductor to increase the inductance?
A. A capacitor in series
B. A resistor in parallel
C. An inductor in parallel
D. An inductor in series
(D) G5C14 GCLM Page (4 - 15)
What is the total resistance of three 100 ohm resistors in parallel?
A. 0.30 ohms
B. 0.33 ohms
C. 33.3 ohms
D. 300 ohms
G5C04 GCLM Page (4 - 17)
𝑅𝐸𝑄𝑈 =1
1𝑅1+1𝑅2+1𝑅
What is the total resistance of three 100 ohm resistors in parallel?
A. 0.30 ohms
B. 0.33 ohms
C. 33.3 ohms
D. 300 ohms
(C) G5C04 GCLM Page (4 - 17)
𝑅𝐸𝑄𝑈 =1
1𝑅1+1𝑅2+1𝑅
= 11100
+1100
+1100
= 13100
= 1003= 33.3 Ω
What is the capacitance of three 100 microfarad capacitors connected in series?
A. 0.30 microfarads
B. 0.33 microfarads
C. 33.3 microfarads
D. 300 microfarads
G5C09 GCLM Page (4 - 17)
𝐶𝐸𝑄𝑈 =1
1𝐶1+1𝐶2+1𝐶
What is the capacitance of three 100 microfarad capacitors connected in series?
A. 0.30 microfarads
B. 0.33 microfarads
C. 33.3 microfarads
D. 300 microfarads
(C) G5C09 GCLM Page (4 - 17)
𝐶𝐸𝑄𝑈 =1
1𝐶1+1𝐶2+1𝐶
= 11100
+1100
+1100
= 13100
= 1003= 33.3 𝜇𝐹
What is the inductance of three 10 millihenry inductors connected in parallel?
A. 0.30 henries
B. 3.3 henries
C. 3.3 millihenries
D. 30 millihenries
G5C10 GCLM Page (4 - 17)
𝐿𝐸𝑄𝑈 =1
1𝐿1+1𝐿2+1𝐿
What is the inductance of three 10 millihenry inductors connected in parallel?
A. 0.30 henries
B. 3.3 henries
C. 3.3 millihenries
D. 30 millihenries
(C) G5C10 GCLM Page (4 - 17)
𝐿𝐸𝑄𝑈 =1
1𝐿1+1𝐿2+1𝐿
= 1110+110+110
= 1310
= 103= 3.3 𝑚𝐻
What is the inductance of a 20 millihenry inductor connected in series with a 50 millihenry inductor?
A. 0.07 millihenries
B. 14.3 millihenries
C. 70 millihenries
D. 1000 millihenries
G5C11 GCLM Page (4 - 17)
𝐿𝐸𝑄𝑈 = 𝐿1 + 𝐿2
What is the inductance of a 20 millihenry inductor connected in series with a 50 millihenry inductor?
A. 0.07 millihenries
B. 14.3 millihenries
C. 70 millihenries
D. 1000 millihenries
(C) G5C11 GCLM Page (4 - 17)
𝐿𝐸𝑄𝑈 = 𝐿1 + 𝐿2 = 20 + 50 = 70 𝑚𝐻
What is the capacitance of a 20 microfarad capacitor connected in series with a 50 microfarad capacitor?
A. 0.07 microfarads
B. 14.3 microfarads
C. 70 microfarads
D. 1000 microfarads
G5C12 GCLM Page (4 - 17)
𝐶𝐸𝑄𝑈 =1
1𝐶1+1𝐶2
𝑜𝑟 𝐶𝐸𝑄𝑈 =𝐶1𝑥𝐶2𝐶1+𝐶2
What is the capacitance of a 20 microfarad capacitor connected in series with a 50 microfarad capacitor?
A. 0.07 microfarads
B. 14.3 microfarads
C. 70 microfarads
D. 1000 microfarads
(B) G5C12 GCLM Page (4 - 17)
𝐶𝐸𝑄𝑈 =1
1𝐶1+1𝐶2
𝑜𝑟 𝐶𝐸𝑄𝑈 =𝐶1𝑥𝐶2𝐶1+𝐶2
𝐶𝐸𝑄𝑈 =1
120+150
= 10.07
= 14.3 𝜇𝐹
𝐶𝐸𝑄𝑈 =20𝑥5020+50
= 100070
= 14.3 𝜇𝐹
What is the total resistance of a 10 ohm, a 20 ohm, and a 50 ohm resistor connected in parallel?
A. 5.9 ohms
B. 0.17 ohms
C. 10000 ohms
D. 80 ohms
G5C15 GCLM Page (4 - 18)
𝑅𝐸𝑄𝑈 =1
1𝑅1+1𝑅2+1𝑅
What is the total resistance of a 10 ohm, a 20 ohm, and a 50 ohm resistor connected in parallel?
A. 5.9 ohms
B. 0.17 ohms
C. 10000 ohms
D. 80 ohms
(A) G5C15 GCLM Page (4 - 18)
𝑅𝐸𝑄𝑈 =1
1𝑅1+1𝑅2+1𝑅
= 1110+120+150
= 1.1+0.05+0.02
= 5.9 Ω
What is the equivalent capacitance of two 5.0 nanofaradcapacitors and one 750 picofarad capacitor connected
in parallel?
A. 576.9 nanofarads
B. 1733 picofarads
C. 3583 picofarads
D. 10.750 nanofarads
G5C08 GCLM Page (4 - 18)
𝐶𝐸𝑄𝑈 = 𝐶1 + 𝐶2
What is the equivalent capacitance of two 5.0 nanofaradcapacitors and one 750 picofarad capacitor connected
in parallel?
A. 576.9 nanofarads
B. 1733 picofarads
C. 3583 picofarads
D. 10.750 nanofarads
(D) G5C08 GCLM Page (4 - 18)
𝐶𝐸𝑄𝑈 = 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 = 5000 𝑝𝐹 + 5000 𝑝𝐹 + 750 𝑝𝐹 = 10,750 𝑝𝐹
First, convert 5 nF to pF: 5 𝑛𝐹 𝑥 1000 = 5000 𝑝𝐹
Second, convert 10,750 pF to nF: 10,750 𝑝𝐹 ÷ 1000 = 10.750 𝑛𝐹
Wait! We’re not done! We must convert to nF!
If three equal value resistors in series produce 450 ohms, what is the value of each resistor?
A. 1500 ohms
B. 90 ohms
C. 150 ohms
D. 175 ohms
G5C05 GCLM Page (4 - 18)
If three equal value resistors in series produce 450 ohms, what is the value of each resistor?
A. 1500 ohms
B. 90 ohms
C. 150 ohms
D. 175 ohms
(C) G5C05 GCLM Page (4 - 18
𝑅𝐸𝑄𝑈 = 𝑅 + 𝑅 + 𝑅 = 𝑅 𝑥 3 = 450 Ω
𝑅𝐸𝑄𝑈 =4503= 150 Ω
so
4.4 Reactance, Impedance, and Resonance
REACTANCE G5A02 — What is reactance? G5A03 — Which of the following causes opposition to the flow of alternating current in an
inductor? G5A04 — Which of the following causes opposition to the flow of alternating current in a
capacitor? G5A05 — How does an inductor react to AC? G5A06 — How does a capacitor react to AC? G5A09 — What unit is used to measure reactance? G6A06 — Which of the following is a reason not to use wire-wound resistors in an RF circuit?
What is reactance?
A. Opposition to the flow of direct current caused by resistance
B. Opposition to the flow of alternating current caused by capacitance or inductance
C. A property of ideal resistors in AC circuits
D. A large spark produced at switch contacts when an inductor is de-energized
G5A02 GCLM Page (4 - 18)
What is reactance?
A. Opposition to the flow of direct current caused by resistance
B. Opposition to the flow of alternating current caused by capacitance or inductance
C. A property of ideal resistors in AC circuits
D. A large spark produced at switch contacts when an inductor is de-energized
(B) G5A02 GCLM Page (4 - 18)
Which of the following causes opposition to the flow of alternating current in an inductor?
A. Conductance
B. Reluctance
C. Admittance
D. Reactance
G5A03 GCLM Page (4 - 19)
Which of the following causes opposition to the flow of alternating current in an inductor?
A. Conductance
B. Reluctance
C. Admittance
D. Reactance
(D) G5A03 GCLM Page (4 - 19)
Which of the following causes opposition to the flow of alternating current in a capacitor?
A. Conductance
B. Reluctance
C. Reactance
D. Admittance
G5A04 GCLM Page (4 - 19)
Which of the following causes opposition to the flow of alternating current in a capacitor?
A. Conductance
B. Reluctance
C. Reactance
D. Admittance
(C) G5A04 GCLM Page (4 - 19)
What unit is used to measure reactance?
A. Farad
B. Ohm
C. Ampere
D. Siemens
G5A09 GCLM Page (4 - 19)
What unit is used to measure reactance?
A. Farad
B. Ohm
C. Ampere
D. Siemens
(B) G5A09 GCLM Page (4 - 19)
How does a capacitor react to AC?
A. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
B. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
C. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
D. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
G5A06 GCLM Page (4 - 19)
How does a capacitor react to AC?
A. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
B. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
C. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
D. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
(A) G5A06 GCLM Page (4 - 19)
How does an inductor react to AC?
A. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
B. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
C. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
D. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
G5A05 GCLM Page (4 - 20)
How does an inductor react to AC?
A. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
B. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
C. As the amplitude of the applied AC increases, the reactance decreases
D. As the frequency of the applied AC increases, the reactance increases
(D) G5A05 GCLM Page (4 - 20)
Which of the following is a reason not to use wire-wound resistors in an RF circuit?
A. The resistor’s tolerance value would not be adequate for such a circuit
B. The resistor’s inductance could make circuit performance unpredictable
C. The resistor could overheat
D. The resistor’s internal capacitance would detune the circuit
G6A06 GCLM Page (4 - 21)
Which of the following is a reason not to use wire-wound resistors in an RF circuit?
A. The resistor’s tolerance value would not be adequate for such a circuit
B. The resistor’s inductance could make circuit performance unpredictable
C. The resistor could overheat
D. The resistor’s internal capacitance would detune the circuit
(B) G6A06 GCLM Page (4 - 21)
IMPEDANCE and RESONANCE
G5A01 — What is impedance? G5A07 — What happens when the impedance of an electrical load is equal to the output
impedance of a power source, assuming both impedances are resistive? G5A08 — What is one reason to use an impedance matching transformer? G5A10 — Which of the following devices can be used for impedance matching at radio
frequencies? G5A11 — Which of the following describes one method of impedance matching between two AC
circuits? G5C07 — What is the turns ratio of a transformer used to match an audio amplifier having 600
ohm output impedance to a speaker having 4 ohm impedance? G6A11 — What happens when an inductor is operated above its self-resonant frequency?
Impedance is a general term for the opposition to current
flow in an ac circuit caused by resistance, reactance or any combination of the two. [G5A01] Impedance is symbolized by the letter Z and measured in ohms. Like resistance, impedance is the ratio of voltage to current. For example, in Figure 4.13, the impedance of whatever is in the “black box” is computed as the applied voltage of 250 V ac divided by the measured current of 2 A. The result is 125 Ω, regardless of whether the impedance is the result of a 125 Ω resistor or an inductor or a capacitor with a reactance of 125 Ω at the frequency of the ac voltage or even a combination of resistance and reactance that limited current to 2 A. How could you tell what was inside the box? Changing frequency and re-measuring current would be useful, since resistance does not change with frequency, while reactances do!
Resonance is the condition in which there is a match
between the frequency at which a circuit or antenna naturally responds and the frequency of an applied signal. Resonance in a circuit or antenna occurs when the capacitive and inductive reactances present are equal. In the series circuit shown in Figure 4.14, at resonance the reactances of L and C cancel to make a short circuit. This leaves the resistance, R, as the circuit’s impedance. In a resonant parallel circuit of L, C and R the reactances cancel, but this time L and C form an open circuit and again only R is left as the circuit impedance. Resonance is put to good use in filters and tuning circuits to select or reject specific frequencies at which resonance occurs. Resonance can also occur when a component’s expected reactance is equal to the reactance of its parasitic reactance. This is called self-resonance. The result is a component that appears to be a short- or open-circuit at the self-resonant frequency. Above the self-resonant frequency, the component’s reactance switches type, making an inductor capacitive and a capacitor inductive. [G6A11] This can cause significant problems in a radio-frequency circuit!
Figure 4.14 – This series circuit is resonant when the capacitive reactance C equals the inductive reactance of L. At resonance, the reactances cancel, leaving R as the only impedance in the circuit.
This is the “fly wheel effect” of a parallel L C circuit at resonance.
10 mH (L)
0.18 µF (C)
100 Ω (R)
Ch. 2
Ch. 1
Grounds
Sig. Gen.
Ch. 1𝑽𝒈𝒆𝒏.
Ch. 2𝑽𝑳
Ch. 3Math (Ch. 1 – Ch. 2)
𝑽𝑪Resonant Frequency
3,753.22 Hz.Set Up
Resonance in the circuit occurs when the capacitive and inductive reactances present are equal (𝑋𝐿 𝑋𝐶). In the series circuit, at resonance, the reactances of L and C cancel (90° out of phase) to make a short circuit. This leaves the resistance, R, as the circuit’s impedance. The 100 Ω resistor provides a load for the generator, so the yellow trace of 𝑽𝒈𝒆𝒏. won’t go completely flat.
That would distort the generator.
See Math and Schematic Diagram in the next slide.
LAB
• 𝑓 = 1
2𝜋 𝐿𝐶
• 𝑓 = 1
6.28 𝑥 10− 𝑥 .18−6
• 𝑓 = 1
6.28 𝑥 .01 𝑥 .00000018
• 𝑓 = 1
6.28 𝑥 .000042426
• 𝑓 = 1
.0002664 8
• 𝑓 = 3,753.22 Hz
Scope Ch. 1𝑉𝑔𝑒𝑛.
Scope Ch. 2𝑉𝐿
Scope Ch. 3 (Math Ch. 1 – Ch. 2)𝑉𝐶
Sine WaveGenerator
MATH
What is impedance?
A. The electric charge stored by a capacitor
B. The inverse of resistance
C. The opposition to the flow of current in an AC circuit
D. The force of repulsion between two similar electric fields
G5A01 GCLM Page (4 - 21)
What is impedance?
A. The electric charge stored by a capacitor
B. The inverse of resistance
C. The opposition to the flow of current in an AC circuit
D. The force of repulsion between two similar electric fields
(C) G5A01 GCLM Page (4 - 21)
What happens when an inductor is operated above its self-resonant frequency?
A. Its reactance increases
B. Harmonics are generated
C. It becomes capacitive
D. Catastrophic failure is likely
G6A11 GCLM Page (4 - 22)
What happens when an inductor is operated above its self-resonant frequency?
A. Its reactance increases
B. Harmonics are generated
C. It becomes capacitive
D. Catastrophic failure is likely
(C) G6A11 GCLM Page (4 - 22)
What is the turns ratio of a transformer used to match an audio amplifier having 600 ohm output impedance to a speaker having
4 ohm impedance?
A. 12.2 to 1
B. 24.4 to 1
C. 150 to 1
D. 300 to 1
G5C07 GCLM Page (4 - 22)
𝑇𝑢𝑟𝑛𝑠 𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 = 𝑁𝑃𝑁𝑆= 𝑍𝑃
𝑍𝑆
What is the turns ratio of a transformer used to match an audio amplifier having 600 ohm output impedance to a speaker having
4 ohm impedance?
A. 12.2 to 1
B. 24.4 to 1
C. 150 to 1
D. 300 to 1
(A) G5C07 GCLM Page (4 - 22)
𝑇𝑢𝑟𝑛𝑠 𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 = 𝑁𝑃𝑁𝑆= 𝑍𝑃
𝑍𝑆= 600
4 = 150 = 12.25
What happens when the impedance of an electrical load is equal to the output impedance of a power source, assuming both
impedances are resistive?
A. The source delivers minimum power to the load
B. The electrical load is shorted
C. No current can flow through the circuit
D. The source can deliver maximum power to the load
G5A07 GCLM Page (4 - 22)
What happens when the impedance of an electrical load is equal to the output impedance of a power source, assuming both
impedances are resistive?
A. The source delivers minimum power to the load
B. The electrical load is shorted
C. No current can flow through the circuit
D. The source can deliver maximum power to the load
(D) G5A07 GCLM Page (4 - 22)
Which of the following describes one method of impedance matching between two AC circuits?
A. Insert an LC network between the two circuits
B. Reduce the power output of the first circuit
C. Increase the power output of the first circuit
D. Insert a circulator between the two circuits
G5A11 GCLM Page (4 - 23)
Which of the following describes one method of impedance matching between two AC circuits?
A. Insert an LC network between the two circuits
B. Reduce the power output of the first circuit
C. Increase the power output of the first circuit
D. Insert a circulator between the two circuits
(A) G5A11 GCLM Page (4 - 23)
What is one reason to use an impedance matching transformer?
A. To minimize transmitter power output
B. To maximize the transfer of power
C. To reduce power supply ripple
D. To minimize radiation resistance
G5A08 GCLM Page (4 - 23)
What is one reason to use an impedance matching transformer?
A. To minimize transmitter power output
B. To maximize the transfer of power
C. To reduce power supply ripple
D. To minimize radiation resistance
(B) G5A08 GCLM Page (4 - 23)
Which of the following devices can be used for impedance matching at radio frequencies?
A. A transformer
B. A Pi-network
C. A length of transmission line
D. All these choices are correct
G5A10 GCLM Page (4 - 23)
Which of the following devices can be used for impedance matching at radio frequencies?
A. A transformer
B. A Pi-network
C. A length of transmission line
D. All these choices are correct
(D) G5A10 GCLM Page (4 - 23)
4.5 Active Components
SEMICONDUCTOR COMPONENTS
G6A03 — What is the approximate junction threshold voltage of a germanium diode? G6A05 — What is the approximate junction threshold voltage of a conventional silicon diode? G6A07 — What are the stable operating points for a bipolar transistor used as a switch in a logic
circuit? G6A09 — Which of the following describes the construction of a MOSFET?
What is the approximate junction threshold voltage of a germanium diode?
A. 0.1 volt
B. 0.3 volts
C. 0.7 volts
D. 1.0 volts
G6A03 GCLM Page (4 - 24)
What is the approximate junction threshold voltage of a germanium diode?
A. 0.1 volt
B. 0.3 volts
C. 0.7 volts
D. 1.0 volts
(B) G6A03 GCLM Page (4 - 24)
What is the approximate junction threshold voltage of a conventional silicon diode?
A. 0.1 volt
B. 0.3 volts
C. 0.7 volts
D. 1.0 volts
G6A05 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
What is the approximate junction threshold voltage of a conventional silicon diode?
A. 0.1 volt
B. 0.3 volts
C. 0.7 volts
D. 1.0 volts
(C) G6A05 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
Which of the following describes the construction of a MOSFET?
A. The gate is formed by a back-biased junction
B. The gate is separated from the channel with a thin insulating layer
C. The source is separated from the drain by a thin insulating layer
D. The source is formed by depositing metal on silicon
G6A09 GCLM Page (4 - 25)
Which of the following describes the construction of a MOSFET?
A. The gate is formed by a back-biased junction
B. The gate is separated from the channel with a thin insulating layer
C. The source is separated from the drain by a thin insulating layer
D. The source is formed by depositing metal on silicon
(B) G6A09 GCLM Page (4 - 25)
What are the stable operating points for a bipolar transistor used as a switch in a logic circuit?
A. Its saturation and cutoff regions
B. Its active region (between the cutoff and saturation regions)
C. Its peak and valley current points
D. Its enhancement and depletion modes
G6A07 GCLM Page (4 - 25)
What are the stable operating points for a bipolar transistor used as a switch in a logic circuit?
A. Its saturation and cutoff regions
B. Its active region (between the cutoff and saturation regions)
C. Its peak and valley current points
D. Its enhancement and depletion modes
(A) G6A07 GCLM Page (4 - 25)
VACUUM TUBES
G6A10 — Which element of a triode vacuum tube is used to regulate the flow of electrons between cathode and plate?
G6A12 — What is the primary purpose of a screen grid in a vacuum tube?
Which element of a triode vacuum tube is used to regulate the flow of electrons between cathode and plate?
A. Control grid
B. Heater
C. Screen grid
D. Trigger electrode
G6A10 GCLM Page (4 - 26)
Which element of a triode vacuum tube is used to regulate the flow of electrons between cathode and plate?
A. Control grid
B. Heater
C. Screen grid
D. Trigger electrode
(A) G6A10 GCLM Page (4 - 26)
What is the primary purpose of a screen grid in a vacuum tube?
A. To reduce grid-to-plate capacitance
B. To increase efficiency
C. To increase the control grid resistance
D. To decrease plate resistance
G6A12 GCLM Page (4 - 26)
What is the primary purpose of a screen grid in a vacuum tube?
A. To reduce grid-to-plate capacitance
B. To increase efficiency
C. To increase the control grid resistance
D. To decrease plate resistance
(A) G6A12 GCLM Page (4 - 26)
ANALOG AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
G6B02 — What is meant by the term MMIC? G6B03 — Which of the following is an advantage of CMOS integrated circuits compared to TTL
integrated circuits? G6B06 — What kind of device is an integrated circuit operational amplifier? G7B03 — Which of the following describes the function of a two-input AND gate? G7B04 — Which of the following describes the function of a two input NOR gate? G7B05 — How many states does a 3-bit binary counter have? G7B06 — What is a shift register?
What kind of device is an integrated circuit operational amplifier?
A. Digital
B. MMIC
C. Programmable Logic
D. Analog
G6B06 GCLM Page (4 - 27)
What kind of device is an integrated circuit operational amplifier?
A. Digital
B. MMIC
C. Programmable Logic
D. Analog
(D) G6B06 GCLM Page (4 - 27)
Which of the following is an advantage of CMOS integrated circuits compared to TTL integrated circuits?
A. Low power consumption
B. High power handling capability
C. Better suited for RF amplification
D. Better suited for power supply regulation
G6B03 GCLM Page (4 - 28)
Which of the following is an advantage of CMOS integrated circuits compared to TTL integrated circuits?
A. Low power consumption
B. High power handling capability
C. Better suited for RF amplification
D. Better suited for power supply regulation
(A) G6B03 GCLM Page (4 - 28)
Table 4.4Logic Family Characteristics
Family Name Maximum Frequency Power Powerof Operation Consumption Supply
TTL 100 MHz High 5 VCMOS 1 GHz Low 3 – 5 VCMOS (CD4000) 1 MHz Very Low 3 – 15 V
Which of the following describes the function of a two-input AND gate?
A. Output is high when either or both inputs are low
B. Output is high only when both inputs are high
C. Output is low when either or both inputs are high
D. Output is low only when both inputs are high
G7B03 GCLM Page (4 - 28)
Which of the following describes the function of a two-input AND gate?
A. Output is high when either or both inputs are low
B. Output is high only when both inputs are high
C. Output is low when either or both inputs are high
D. Output is low only when both inputs are high
(B) G7B03 GCLM Page (4 - 28)
Which of the following describes the function of a two-input NOR gate?
A. Output is high when either or both inputs are low
B. Output is high only when both inputs are high
C. Output is low when either or both inputs are high
D. Output is low only when both inputs are high
G7B04 GCLM Page (4 - 28)
Which of the following describes the function of a two-input NOR gate?
A. Output is high when either or both inputs are low
B. Output is high only when both inputs are high
C. Output is low when either or both inputs are high
D. Output is low only when both inputs are high
(C) G7B04 GCLM Page (4 - 28)
When a digital signal, such as a pulse or square wave, is applied to the clock input, the rising edge (the edge that goes from low to high or from 0 to 1) causes the Q output to be 1 if the D input is 1 and vice versa. The Q and Qoutputs stay in that state until the next rising edge is applied to the clock input.
How many states does a 3-bit binary counter have?
A. 3
B. 6
C. 8
D. 16
G7B05 GCLM Page (4 - 28)
How many states does a 3-bit binary counter have?
A. 3
B. 6
C. 8
D. 16
(C) G7B05 GCLM Page (4 - 28)A 3-bit binary up counter using D-type flip flops is a counter circuit used in the field of digital electronics to count from binary 000 to binary 111, therefore the count is decimal 0 to decimal 7.
3 bit4 bit
What is a shift register?
A. A clocked array of circuits that passes data in steps along the array
B. An array of operational amplifiers used for tri-state arithmetic operations
C. A digital mixer
D. An analog mixer
G7B06 GCLM Page (4 - 28)
What is a shift register?
A. A clocked array of circuits that passes data in steps along the array
B. An array of operational amplifiers used for tri-state arithmetic operations
C. A digital mixer
D. An analog mixer
(A) G7B06 GCLM Page (4 - 28)
What is meant by the term MMIC?
A. Multi-Megabyte Integrated Circuit
B. Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit
C. Military Manufactured Integrated Circuit
D. Mode Modulated Integrated Circuit
G6B02 GCLM Page (4 - 30)
What is meant by the term MMIC?
A. Multi-Megabyte Integrated Circuit
B. Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit
C. Military Manufactured Integrated Circuit
D. Mode Modulated Integrated Circuit
(B) G6B02 GCLM Page (4 - 30)
Monolithic microwave integrated circuit, or MMIC (sometimes pronounced "mimic"), is a type of integrated circuit (IC) device that operates at microwave frequencies (300 MHz to 300 GHz). These devices typically perform functions such as microwave mixing, power amplification, low-noise amplification, and high-frequency switching. Inputs and outputs on MMIC devices are frequently matched to a characteristic impedance of 50 ohms. This makes them easier to use, as cascading of MMICs does not then require an external matching network. Additionally, most microwave test equipment is designed to operate in a 50-ohm environment.
MICROPROCESSORS AND RELATED COMPONENTS
G6B04 — What is meant by the term ROM? G6B05 — What is meant when memory is characterized as non-volatile? G6B08 — How is an LED biased when emitting light? G6B09 — Which of the following is a characteristic of a liquid crystal display?
.
What is meant when memory is characterized as non-volatile?
A. It is resistant to radiation damage
B. It is resistant to high temperatures
C. The stored information is maintained even if power is removed
D. The stored information cannot be changed once written
G6B05 GCLM Page (4 - 30)
What is meant when memory is characterized as non-volatile?
A. It is resistant to radiation damage
B. It is resistant to high temperatures
C. The stored information is maintained even if power is removed
D. The stored information cannot be changed once written
(C) G6B05 GCLM Page (4 - 30)
What is meant by the term ROM?
A. Resistor Operated Memory
B. Read Only Memory
C. Random Operational Memory
D. Resistant to Overload Memory
G6B04 GCLM Page (4 - 30)
What is meant by the term ROM?
A. Resistor Operated Memory
B. Read Only Memory
C. Random Operational Memory
D. Resistant to Overload Memory
(B) G6B04 GCLM Page (4 - 30)
How is an LED biased when emitting light?
A. Beyond cutoff
B. At the Zener voltage
C. Reverse biased
D. Forward biased
G6B08 GCLM Page (4 - 31)
How is an LED biased when emitting light?
A. Beyond cutoff
B. At the Zener voltage
C. Reverse biased
D. Forward biased
(D) G6B08 GCLM Page (4 - 31)
Which of the following is a characteristic of a liquid crystal display?
A. It utilizes ambient or back lighting
B. It offers a wide dynamic range
C. It consumes relatively high power
D. It has relatively short lifetime
G6B09 GCLM Page (4 - 31)
Which of the following is a characteristic of a liquid crystal display?
A. It utilizes ambient or back lighting
B. It offers a wide dynamic range
C. It consumes relatively high power
D. It has relatively short lifetime
(A) G6B09 GCLM Page (4 - 31)
4.6 Practical Circuits RECTIFIERS AND POWER SUPPLIES
G7A01 — What useful feature does a power supply bleeder resistor provide? G7A02 — Which of the following components are used in a power supply filter network? G7A03 — Which type of rectifier circuit uses two diodes and a center-tapped transformer? G7A04 — What is an advantage of a half-wave rectifier in a power supply? G7A05 — What portion of the AC cycle is converted to DC by a half-wave rectifier? G7A06 — What portion of the AC cycle is converted to DC by a full-wave rectifier? G7A07 — What is the output waveform of an unfiltered full-wave rectifier connected to a
resistive load? G7A08 — Which of the following is an advantage of a switchmode power supply as compared to
a linear power supply?
.
What is an advantage of a half-wave rectifier in a power supply?
A. Only one diode is required
B. The ripple frequency is twice that of a full-wave rectifier
C. More current can be drawn from the half-wave rectifier
D. The output voltage is two times the peak output voltage of the transformer
G7A04 GCLM Page (4 - 32)
What is an advantage of a half-wave rectifier in a power supply?
A. Only one diode is required
B. The ripple frequency is twice that of a full-wave rectifier
C. More current can be drawn from the half-wave rectifier
D. The output voltage is two times the peak output voltage of the transformer
(A) G7A04 GCLM Page (4 - 32)
What portion of the AC cycle is converted to DC by a half-wave rectifier?
A. 90 degrees
B. 180 degrees
C. 270 degrees
D. 360 degrees
G7A05 GCLM Page (4 - 32)
What portion of the AC cycle is converted to DC by a half-wave rectifier?
A. 90 degrees
B. 180 degrees
C. 270 degrees
D. 360 degrees
(B) G7A05 GCLM Page (4 - 32)
Which type of rectifier circuit uses two diodes and a center-tapped transformer?
A. Full-wave
B. Full-wave bridge
C. Half-wave
D. Synchronous
G7A03 GCLM Page (4 - 32)
Which type of rectifier circuit uses two diodes and a center-tapped transformer?
A. Full-wave
B. Full-wave bridge
C. Half-wave
D. Synchronous
(A) G7A03 GCLM Page (4 - 32)
What portion of the AC cycle is converted to DC by a full-wave rectifier?
A. 90 degrees
B. 180 degrees
C. 270 degrees
D. 360 degrees
G7A06 GCLM Page (4 - 32)
What portion of the AC cycle is converted to DC by a full-wave rectifier?
A. 90 degrees
B. 180 degrees
C. 270 degrees
D. 360 degrees
(D) G7A06 GCLM Page (4 - 32)
What is the output waveform of an unfiltered full-wave rectifier connected to a resistive load?
A. A series of DC pulses at twice the frequency of the AC input
B. A series of DC pulses at the same frequency as the AC input
C. A sine wave at half the frequency of the AC input
D. A steady DC voltage
G7A07 GCLM Page (4 - 32)
What is the output waveform of an unfiltered full-wave rectifier connected to a resistive load?
A. A series of DC pulses at twice the frequency of the AC input
B. A series of DC pulses at the same frequency as the AC input
C. A sine wave at half the frequency of the AC input
D. A steady DC voltage
(A) G7A07 GCLM Page (4 - 32)
Which of the following components are used in a power supply filter network?
A. Diodes
B. Transformers and transducers
C. Quartz crystals
D. Capacitors and inductors
G7A02 GCLM Page (4 - 33)
Which of the following components are used in a power supply filter network?
A. Diodes
B. Transformers and transducers
C. Quartz crystals
D. Capacitors and inductors
(D) G7A02 GCLM Page (4 - 33)
What useful feature does a power supply bleeder resistor provide?
A. It acts as a fuse for excess voltage
B. It ensures that the filter capacitors are discharged when power is removed
C. It removes shock hazards from the induction coils
D. It eliminates ground loop current
G7A01 GCLM Page (4 - 33)
What useful feature does a power supply bleeder resistor provide?
A. It acts as a fuse for excess voltage
B. It ensures that the filter capacitors are discharged when power is removed
C. It removes shock hazards from the induction coils
D. It eliminates ground loop current
(B) G7A01 GCLM Page (4 - 33)
Which of the following is an advantage of a switchmode power supply as compared to a linear power supply?
A. Faster switching time makes higher output voltage possible
B. Fewer circuit components are required
C. High-frequency operation allows the use of smaller components
D. All these choices are correct
G7A08 GCLM Page (4 - 33)
Which of the following is an advantage of a switchmode power supply as compared to a linear power supply?
A. Faster switching time makes higher output voltage possible
B. Fewer circuit components are required
C. High-frequency operation allows the use of smaller components
D. All these choices are correct
(C) G7A08 GCLM Page (4 - 33)
Switching Power Supply Linear Power Supply
BATTERIES AND CHARGERS
G4E08 — What is the name of the process by which sunlight is changed directly into electricity? G4E09 — What is the approximate open-circuit voltage from a fully illuminated silicon
photovoltaic cell? G4E10 — What is the reason that a series diode is connected between a solar panel and a
storage battery that is being charged by the panel? G4E11 — Which of the following is a disadvantage of using wind as the primary source of power
for an emergency station? G6A01 — What is the minimum allowable discharge voltage for maximum life of a standard 12
volt lead-acid battery? G6A02 — What is an advantage of the low internal resistance of nickel-cadmium batteries?
What is the minimum allowable discharge voltage for maximum life of a standard 12 volt lead-acid battery?
A. 6 volts
B. 8.5 volts
C. 10.5 volts
D. 12 volts
G6A01 GCLM Page (4 - 36)
What is the minimum allowable discharge voltage for maximum life of a standard 12 volt lead-acid battery?
A. 6 volts
B. 8.5 volts
C. 10.5 volts
D. 12 volts
(C) G6A01 GCLM Page (4 - 36)
What is an advantage of the low internal resistance of nickel-cadmium batteries?
A. Long life
B. High discharge current
C. High voltage
D. Rapid recharge
G6A02 GCLM Page (4 - 36)
What is an advantage of the low internal resistance of nickel-cadmium batteries?
A. Long life
B. High discharge current
C. High voltage
D. Rapid recharge
(B) G6A02 GCLM Page (4 - 36)
What is the name of the process by which sunlight is changed directly into electricity?
A. Photovoltaic conversion
B. Photon emission
C. Photosynthesis
D. Photon decomposition
G4E08 GCLM Page (4 - 36)
What is the name of the process by which sunlight is changed directly into electricity?
A. Photovoltaic conversion
B. Photon emission
C. Photosynthesis
D. Photon decomposition
(A) G4E08 GCLM Page (4 - 36)
What is the approximate open-circuit voltage from a fully illuminated silicon photovoltaic cell?
A. 0.02 VDC
B. 0.5 VDC
C. 0.2 VDC
D. 1.38 VDC
G4E09 GCLM Page (4 - 36)
What is the approximate open-circuit voltage from a fully illuminated silicon photovoltaic cell?
A. 0.02 VDC
B. 0.5 VDC
C. 0.2 VDC
D. 1.38 VDC
(B) G4E09 GCLM Page (4 - 36)
Which of the following is a disadvantage of using wind as the primary source of power for an emergency station?
A. The conversion efficiency from mechanical energy to electrical energy is less than 2 percent
B. The voltage and current ratings of such systems are not compatible with amateur equipment
C. A large energy storage system is needed to supply power when the wind is not blowing
D. All these choices are correctG4E11 GCLM Page (4 - 37)
Which of the following is a disadvantage of using wind as the primary source of power for an emergency station?
A. The conversion efficiency from mechanical energy to electrical energy is less than 2 percent
B. The voltage and current ratings of such systems are not compatible with amateur equipment
C. A large energy storage system is needed to supply power when the wind is not blowing
D. All these choices are correct(C) G4E11 GCLM Page (4 - 37)
What is the reason that a series diode is connected between a solar panel and a storage battery that is being charged by the
panel?
A. The diode serves to regulate the charging voltage to prevent overcharge
B. The diode prevents self-discharge of the battery through the panel during times of low or no illumination
C. The diode limits the current flowing from the panel to a safe value
D. The diode greatly increases the efficiency during times of high illumination
G4E10 GCLM Page (4 - 37)
What is the reason that a series diode is connected between a solar panel and a storage battery that is being charged by the
panel?A. The diode serves to regulate the charging voltage to prevent overcharge
B. The diode prevents self-discharge of the battery through the panel during times of low or no illumination
C. The diode limits the current flowing from the panel to a safe value
D. The diode greatly increases the efficiency during times
of high illumination
(B) G4E10 GCLM Page (4 - 37)
CONNECTORS
G2E12 — Which of the following connectors would be a good choice for a serial data port? G6B07 — Which of the following describes a type N connector? G6B11 — What is a type SMA connector? G6B12 — Which of these connector types is commonly used for audio signals in Amateur Radio
stations? G6B13 — Which of these connector types is commonly used for RF connections at frequencies
up to 150 MHz?
Which of these connector types is commonly used for audio signals in Amateur Radio stations?
A. PL-259
B. BNC
C. RCA Phono
D. Type N
G6B12 GCLM Page (4 - 38)
Which of these connector types is commonly used for audio signals in Amateur Radio stations?
A. PL-259
B. BNC
C. RCA Phono
D. Type N
(C) G6B12 GCLM Page (4 - 38)
Which of these connector types is commonly used for RF connections at frequencies up to 150 MHz?
A. Octal
B. RJ-11
C. PL-259
D. DB-25
G6B13 GCLM Page (4 - 39)
Which of these connector types is commonly used for RF connections at frequencies up to 150 MHz?
A. Octal
B. RJ-11
C. PL-259
D. DB-25
(C) G6B13 GCLM Page (4 - 39)
Which of the following describes a type N connector?
A. A moisture-resistant RF connector useful to 10 GHz
B. A small bayonet connector used for data circuits
C. A threaded connector used for hydraulic systems
D. An audio connector used in surround-sound installations
G6B07 GCLM Page (4 - 40)
Which of the following describes a type N connector?
A. A moisture-resistant RF connector useful to 10 GHz
B. A small bayonet connector used for data circuits
C. A threaded connector used for hydraulic systems
D. An audio connector used in surround-sound installations
(A) G6B07 GCLM Page (4 - 40)
What is a type SMA connector?
A. A large bayonet connector usable at power levels more than 1 KW
B. A small threaded connector suitable for signals up to several GHz
C. A connector designed for serial multiple access signals
D. A type of push-on connector intended for high-voltage applications
G6B11 GCLM Page (4 - 40)
What is a type SMA connector?
A. A large bayonet connector usable at power levels more than 1 KW
B. A small threaded connector suitable for signals up to several GHz
C. A connector designed for serial multiple access signals
D. A type of push-on connector intended for high-voltage applications
(B) G6B11 GCLM Page (4 - 40)
Which of the following connectors would be a good choice for a serial data port?
A. PL-259
B. Type N
C. Type SMA
D. DE-9
G2E12 GCLM Page (4 - 40)
Which of the following connectors would be a good choice for a serial data port?
A. PL-259
B. Type N
C. Type SMA
D. DE-9
(D) G2E12 GCLM Page (4 - 40)
4.7 Basic Test Equipment G4B01 — What item of test equipment contains horizontal and vertical channel amplifiers? G4B02 — Which of the following is an advantage of an oscilloscope versus a digital voltmeter? G4B03 — Which of the following is the best instrument to use when checking the keying waveform of a CW transmitter? G4B04 — What signal source is connected to the vertical input of an oscilloscope when checking the RF envelope pattern of a
transmitted signal? G4B05 — Why is high input impedance desirable for a voltmeter? G4B06 — What is an advantage of a digital voltmeter as compared to an analog voltmeter? G4B08 — Which of the following instruments may be used to monitor relative RF output when making antenna and
transmitter adjustments? G4B09 — Which of the following can be determined with a field strength meter? G4B10 — Which of the following can be determined with a directional wattmeter? G4B11 — Which of the following must be connected to an antenna analyzer when it is being used for SWR measurements? G4B12 — What problem can occur when making measurements on an antenna system with an antenna analyzer? G4B13 — What is a use for an antenna analyzer other than measuring the SWR of an antenna system? G4B14 — What is an instance in which the use of an instrument with analog readout may be preferred over an instrument with a
digital readout?
What is an instance in which the use of an instrument with analog readout may be preferred over an instrument with digital
readout?
A. When testing logic circuits
B. When high precision is desired
C. When measuring the frequency of an oscillator
D. When adjusting tuned circuits
G4B14 GCLM Page (4 - 41)
What is an instance in which the use of an instrument with analog readout may be preferred over an instrument with digital
readout?
A. When testing logic circuits
B. When high precision is desired
C. When measuring the frequency of an oscillator
D. When adjusting tuned circuits
(D) G4B14 GCLM Page (4 - 41)
What is an advantage of a digital voltmeter as compared to an analog voltmeter?
A. Better for measuring computer circuits
B. Better for RF measurements
C. Better precision for most uses
D. Faster response
G4B06 GCLM Page (4 - 41)
What is an advantage of a digital voltmeter as compared to an analog voltmeter?
A. Better for measuring computer circuits
B. Better for RF measurements
C. Better precision for most uses
D. Faster response
(C) G4B06 GCLM Page (4 - 41)
Why is high input impedance desirable for a voltmeter?
A. It improves the frequency response
B. It decreases battery consumption in the meter
C. It improves the resolution of the readings
D. It decreases the loading on circuits being measured
G4B05 GCLM Page (4 - 41)
Why is high input impedance desirable for a voltmeter?
A. It improves the frequency response
B. It decreases battery consumption in the meter
C. It improves the resolution of the readings
D. It decreases the loading on circuits being measured
(D) G4B05 GCLM Page (4 - 41)
Which of the following is an advantage of an oscilloscope versus a digital voltmeter?
A. An oscilloscope uses less power
B. Complex impedances can be easily measured
C. Input impedance is much lower
D. Complex waveforms can be measured
G4B02 GCLM Page (4 - 42)
Which of the following is an advantage of an oscilloscope versus a digital voltmeter?
A. An oscilloscope uses less power
B. Complex impedances can be easily measured
C. Input impedance is much lower
D. Complex waveforms can be measured
(D) G4B02 GCLM Page (4 - 42)
What item of test equipment contains horizontal and vertical channel amplifiers?
A. An ohmmeter
B. A signal generator
C. An ammeter
D. An oscilloscope
G4B01 GCLM
Page (4 - 42)
What item of test equipment contains horizontal and vertical channel amplifiers?
A. An ohmmeter
B. A signal generator
C. An ammeter
D. An oscilloscope
(D) G4B01 GCLM
Page (4 - 42)
What signal source is connected to the vertical input of an oscilloscope when checking the RF envelope pattern of a
transmitted signal?
A. The local oscillator of the transmitter
B. An external RF oscillator
C. The transmitter balanced mixer output
D. The attenuated RF output of the transmitter
G4B04 GCLM Page (4 - 42)
What signal source is connected to the vertical input of an oscilloscope when checking the RF envelope pattern of a
transmitted signal?
A. The local oscillator of the transmitter
B. An external RF oscillator
C. The transmitter balanced mixer output
D. The attenuated RF output of the transmitter
(D) G4B04 GCLM Page (4 - 42)
Which of the following is the best instrument to use when checking the keying waveform of a CW transmitter?
A. An oscilloscope
B. A field strength meter
C. A sidetone monitor
D. A wavemeter
G4B03 GCLM Page (4 - 42)
Which of the following is the best instrument to use when checking the keying waveform of a CW transmitter?
A. An oscilloscope
B. A field strength meter
C. A sidetone monitor
D. A wavemeter
(A) G4B03 GCLM Page (4 - 42)
Which of the following must be connected to an antenna analyzer when it is being used for SWR measurements?
A. Receiver
B. Transmitter
C. Antenna and feed line
D. All these choices are correct
G4B11 GCLM Page (4 - 42)
Which of the following must be connected to an antenna analyzer when it is being used for SWR measurements?
A. Receiver
B. Transmitter
C. Antenna and feed line
D. All these choices are correct
(C) G4B11 GCLM Page (4 - 42)
What is a use for an antenna analyzer other than measuring the SWR of an antenna system?
A. Measuring the front-to-back ratio of an antenna
B. Measuring the turns ratio of a power transformer
C. Determining the impedance of coaxial cable
D. Determining the gain of a directional antenna
G4B13 GCLM Page (4 - 43)
What is a use for an antenna analyzer other than measuring the SWR of an antenna system?
A. Measuring the front-to-back ratio of an antenna
B. Measuring the turns ratio of a power transformer
C. Determining the impedance of coaxial cable
D. Determining the gain of a directional antenna
(C) G4B13 GCLM Page (4 - 43)
What problem can occur when making measurements on an antenna system with an antenna analyzer?
A. Permanent damage to the analyzer may occur if it is operated into a high SWR
B. Strong signals from nearby transmitters can affect the accuracy of measurements
C. The analyzer can be damaged if measurements outside the ham bands are attempted
D. Connecting the analyzer to an antenna can cause it to absorb harmonics
G4B12 GCLM Page (4 - 43)
What problem can occur when making measurements on an antenna system with an antenna analyzer?
A. Permanent damage to the analyzer may occur if it is operated into a high SWR
B. Strong signals from nearby transmitters can affect the accuracy of measurements
C. The analyzer can be damaged if measurements outside the ham bands are attempted
D. Connecting the analyzer to an antenna can cause it to absorb harmonics
(B) G4B12 GCLM Page (4 - 43)
Which of the following instruments may be used to monitor relative RF output when making antenna and transmitter
adjustments?
A. A field strength meter
B. An antenna noise bridge
C. A multimeter
D. A Q meter
G4B08 GCLM Page (4 - 43)
Which of the following instruments may be used to monitor relative RF output when making antenna and transmitter
adjustments?
A. A field strength meter
B. An antenna noise bridge
C. A multimeter
D. A Q meter
(A) G4B08 GCLM Page (4 - 43)
Which of the following can be determined with a field strength meter?
A. The radiation resistance of an antenna
B. The radiation pattern of an antenna
C. The presence and amount of phase distortion of a transmitter
D. The presence and amount of amplitude distortion of a transmitter
G4B09 GCLM Page (4 - 43)
Which of the following can be determined with a field strength meter?
A. The radiation resistance of an antenna
B. The radiation pattern of an antenna
C. The presence and amount of phase distortion of a transmitter
D. The presence and amount of amplitude distortion of a transmitter
(B) G4B09 GCLM Page (4 - 43)
Which of the following can be determined with a directional wattmeter?
A. Standing wave ratio
B. Antenna front-to-back ratio
C. RF interference
D. Radio wave propagation
G4B10 GCLM Page (4 - 43)
Which of the following can be determined with a directional wattmeter?
A. Standing wave ratio
B. Antenna front-to-back ratio
C. RF interference
D. Radio wave propagation
(A) G4B10 GCLM Page (4 - 43)
Course Overview
IntroductionProcedures and Practices
Rules and RegulationsComponents and Circuits
Radio Signals and EquipmentDigital Modes
AntennasPropagation
Electrical and RF Safety
5.1 Basic Modes and Bandwidth
G8A02 — What is the name of the process that changes the phase angle of an RF signal to convey information? G8A03 — What is the name of the process that changes the instantaneous frequency of an RF wave to convey information? G8A05 — What type of modulation varies the instantaneous power level of the RF signal? G8A07 — Which of the following phone emissions uses the narrowest bandwidth?
What type of modulation varies the instantaneous power level of the RF signal?
A. Frequency shift keying
B. Phase modulation
C. Frequency modulation
D. Amplitude modulation
G8A05 GCLM Page (5 - 1)
What type of modulation varies the instantaneous power level of the RF signal?
A. Frequency shift keying
B. Phase modulation
C. Frequency modulation
D. Amplitude modulation
(D) G8A05 GCLM Page (5 - 1)
What is the name of the process that changes the instantaneous frequency of an RF wave to convey information?
A. Frequency convolution
B. Frequency transformation
C. Frequency conversion
D. Frequency modulation
G8A03 GCLM Page (5 - 2)
What is the name of the process that changes the instantaneous frequency of an RF wave to convey information?
A. Frequency convolution
B. Frequency transformation
C. Frequency conversion
D. Frequency modulation
(D) G8A03 GCLM Page (5 - 2)
What is the name of the process that changes the phase angle of an RF signal to convey information?
A. Phase convolution
B. Phase modulation
C. Phase transformation
D. Phase inversion
G8A02 GCLM Page (5 - 2)
What is the name of the process that changes the phase angle of an RF signal to convey information?
A. Phase convolution
B. Phase modulation
C. Phase transformation
D. Phase inversion
(B) G8A02 GCLM Page (5 - 2)
Which of the following phone emissions uses the narrowest bandwidth?
A. Single sideband
B. Double sideband
C. Phase modulation
D. Frequency modulation
G8A07 GCLM Page (5 - 2)
Which of the following phone emissions uses the narrowest bandwidth?
A. Single sideband
B. Double sideband
C. Phase modulation
D. Frequency modulation
(A) G8A07 GCLM Page (5 - 2)
5.2 Radio’s Building Blocks
G7B07 — Which of the following are basic components of a sine wave oscillator? G7B09 — What determines the frequency of an LC oscillator? G7C05 — Which of the following is an advantage of a direct digital synthesizer (DDS)? G7C09 — What is the phase difference between the I and Q signals that software-defined radio (SDR) equipment uses for modulation and
demodulation? G7C10 — What is an advantage of using I and Q signals in software-defined radios (SDRs)? G7C11 — What is meant by the term “software-defined radio” (SDR)? G7C12 — What is the frequency above which a low-pass filter’s output power is less than half the input power? G7C13 — What term specifies a filter’s maximum ability to reject signals outside its passband? G7C14 — The bandwidth of a band-pass filter is measured between what two frequencies? G7C15 — What term specifies a filter’s attenuation inside its passband? G7C16 — Which of the following is a typical application for a Direct Digital Synthesizer? G8A04 — What emission is produced by a reactance modulator connected to a transmitter RF amplifier stage? G8B03 — What is another term for the mixing of two RF signals? G8B04 — What is the stage in a VHF FM transmitter that generates a harmonic of a lower frequency signal to reach the desired operating
frequency? G8B11 — What combination of a mixer’s Local Oscillator (LO) and RF input frequencies is found in the output?
What is meant by the term “software-defined radio” (SDR)?
A. A radio in which most major signal processing functions are performed by software
B. A radio that provides computer interface for automatic logging of band and frequency
C. A radio that uses crystal filters designed using software
D. A computer model that can simulate performance of a radio to aid in the design process
G7C11 GCLM Page (5 - 3)
What is meant by the term “software-defined radio” (SDR)?
A. A radio in which most major signal processing functions are performed by software
B. A radio that provides computer interface for automatic logging of band and frequency
C. A radio that uses crystal filters designed using software
D. A computer model that can simulate performance of a radio to aid in the design process
(A) G7C11 GCLM Page (5 - 3)
What is the frequency above which a low-pass filter’s output power is less than half the input power?
A. Notch frequency
B. Neper frequency
C. Cutoff frequency
D. Rolloff frequency
G7C12 GCLM Page (5 - 4)
What is the frequency above which a low-pass filter’s output power is less than half the input power?
A. Notch frequency
B. Neper frequency
C. Cutoff frequency
D. Rolloff frequency
(C) G7C12 GCLM Page (5 - 4)
The bandwidth of a band-pass filter is measured between what two frequencies?
A. Upper and lower half-power
B. Cutoff and rolloff
C. Pole and zero
D. Image and harmonic
G7C14 GCLM Page (5 - 4)
The bandwidth of a band-pass filter is measured between what two frequencies?
A. Upper and lower half-power
B. Cutoff and rolloff
C. Pole and zero
D. Image and harmonic
(A) G7C14 GCLM Page (5 - 4)
What term specifies a filter’s attenuation inside its passband?
A. Insertion loss
B. Return loss
C. Q
D. Ultimate rejection
G7C15 GCLM Page (5 - 4)
What term specifies a filter’s attenuation inside its passband?
A. Insertion loss
B. Return loss
C. Q
D. Ultimate rejection
(A) G7C15 GCLM Page (5 - 4)
What term specifies a filter’s maximum ability to reject signals outside its passband?
A. Notch depth
B. Rolloff
C. Insertion loss
D. Ultimate rejection
G7C13 GCLM Page (5 - 4)
What term specifies a filter’s maximum ability to reject signals outside its passband?
A. Notch depth
B. Rolloff
C. Insertion loss
D. Ultimate rejection
(D) G7C13 GCLM Page (5 - 4)
Which of the following are basic components of a sine wave oscillator?
A. An amplifier and a divider
B. A frequency multiplier and a mixer
C. A circulator and a filter operating in a feed-forward loop
D. A filter and an amplifier operating in a feedback loop
G7B07 GCLM Page (5 - 4)
Which of the following are basic components of a sine wave oscillator?
A. An amplifier and a divider
B. A frequency multiplier and a mixer
C. A circulator and a filter operating in a feed-forward loop
D. A filter and an amplifier operating in a feedback loop
(D) G7B07 GCLM Page (5 - 4)
What determines the frequency of an LC oscillator?
A. The number of stages in the counter
B. The number of stages in the divider
C. The inductance and capacitance in the tank circuit
D. The time delay of the lag circuit
G7B09 GCLM Page (5 - 4)
What determines the frequency of an LC oscillator?
A. The number of stages in the counter
B. The number of stages in the divider
C. The inductance and capacitance in the tank circuit
D. The time delay of the lag circuit
(C) G7B09 GCLM Page (5 - 4)
Which of the following is an advantage of a direct digital synthesizer (DDS)?
A. Wide tuning range and no need for band switching
B. Relatively high-power output
C. Relatively low power consumption
D. Variable frequency with the stability of a crystal oscillator
G7C05 GCLM Page (5 - 5)
Which of the following is an advantage of a direct digital synthesizer (DDS)?
A. Wide tuning range and no need for band switching
B. Relatively high-power output
C. Relatively low power consumption
D. Variable frequency with the stability of a crystal oscillator
(D) G7C05 GCLM Page (5 - 5)
Which of the following is a typical application for a Direct Digital Synthesizer?
A. A high-stability variable frequency oscillator in a transceiver
B. A digital voltmeter
C. A digital mode interface between a computer and a transceiver
D. A high-sensitivity radio direction finder
G7C16 GCLM Page (5 - 5)
Which of the following is a typical application for a Direct Digital Synthesizer?
A. A high-stability variable frequency oscillator in a transceiver
B. A digital voltmeter
C. A digital mode interface between a computer and a transceiver
D. A high-sensitivity radio direction finder
(A) G7C16 GCLM Page (5 - 5)
What is another term for the mixing of two RF signals?
A. Heterodyning
B. Synthesizing
C. Cancellation
D. Phase inverting
G8B03 GCLM Page (5 - 5)
What is another term for the mixing of two RF signals?
A. Heterodyning
B. Synthesizing
C. Cancellation
D. Phase inverting
(A) G8B03 GCLM Page (5 - 5)
What combination of a mixer’s Local Oscillator (LO) and RF input frequencies is found in the output?
A. The ratio
B. The average
C. The sum and difference
D. The arithmetic product
G8B11 GCLM Page (5 - 5)
What combination of a mixer’s Local Oscillator (LO) and RF input frequencies is found in the output?
A. The ratio
B. The average
C. The sum and difference
D. The arithmetic product
(C) G8B11 GCLM Page (5 - 5)
What is the stage in a VHF FM transmitter that generates a harmonic of a lower frequency signal to reach the desired
operating frequency?
A. Mixer
B. Reactance modulator
C. Pre-emphasis network
D. Multiplier
G8B04 GCLM Page (5 - 5)
What is the stage in a VHF FM transmitter that generates a harmonic of a lower frequency signal to reach the desired
operating frequency?
A. Mixer
B. Reactance modulator
C. Pre-emphasis network
D. Multiplier
(D) G8B04 GCLM Page (5 - 5)
What emission is produced by a reactance modulator connected to a transmitter RF amplifier stage?
A. Multiplex modulation
B. Phase modulation
C. Amplitude modulation
D. Pulse modulation
G8A04 GCLM Page (5 - 7)
What emission is produced by a reactance modulator connected to a transmitter RF amplifier stage?
A. Multiplex modulation
B. Phase modulation
C. Amplitude modulation
D. Pulse modulation
(B) G8A04 GCLM Page (5 - 7)
What is an advantage of using I and Q signals in software-defined radios (SDRs)?
A. The need for high resolution analog-to-digital converters is eliminated
B. All types of modulation can be created with appropriate processing.
C. Minimum detectible signal level is reduced
D. Converting the signal from digital to analog creates mixing products
G7C10 GCLM Page (5 - 7)
What is an advantage of using I and Q signals in software-defined radios (SDRs)?
A. The need for high resolution analog-to-digital converters is eliminated
B. All types of modulation can be created with appropriate processing.
C. Minimum detectible signal level is reduced
D. Converting the signal from digital to analog creates mixing products
(B) G7C10 GCLM Page (5 - 7)
What is the phase difference between the I and Q signals that software-defined radio (SDR) equipment uses for modulation
and demodulation?
A. Zero
B. 90 degrees
C. 180 degrees
D. 45 degrees
G7C09 GCLM Page (5 - 7)
What is the phase difference between the I and Q signals that software-defined radio (SDR) equipment uses for modulation
and demodulation?
A. Zero
B. 90 degrees
C. 180 degrees
D. 45 degrees
(B) G7C09 GCLM Page (5 - 7)
5.3 Transmitters
G2A12 — What control is typically adjusted for proper ALC setting on an amateur single sideband transceiver? G4B07 — What signals are used to conduct a two-tone test? G4B15 — What type of transmitter performance does a two-tone test analyze? G4D01 — What is the purpose of a speech processor as used in a modern transceiver? G4D02 — Which of the following describes how a speech processor affects a transmitted single sideband phone signal? G4D03 — Which of the following can be the result of an incorrectly adjusted speech processor? G4D08 — What frequency range is occupied by a 3 kHz LSB signal when the displayed carrier frequency is set to 7.178 MHz? G4D09 — What frequency range is occupied by a 3 kHz USB signal with the displayed carrier frequency set to 14.347 MHz? G4D10 — How close to the lower edge of the phone segment should your displayed carrier frequency be when using 3 kHz wide LSB? G4D11 — How close to the upper edge of the phone segment should your displayed carrier frequency be when using 3 kHz wide USB? G7B10 — Which of the following describes a linear amplifier? G7C01 — Which of the following is used to process signals from the balanced modulator then send them to the mixer in some single sideband phone
transmitters? G7C02 — Which circuit is used to combine signals from the carrier oscillator and speech amplifier then send the result to the filter in some single sideband
phone transmitters? G8A08 — Which of the following is an effect of overmodulation? G8A10 — What is meant by the term “flat-topping,” when referring to a single sideband phone transmission? G8A11 — What is the modulation envelope of an AM signal? G8B06 — What is the total bandwidth of an FM phone transmission having 5 kHz deviation and 3 kHz modulating frequency? G8B07 — What is the frequency deviation for a 12.21 MHz reactance modulated oscillator in a 5 kHz deviation, 146.52 MHz FM phone transmitter?
Which circuit is used to combine signals from the carrier oscillator and speech amplifier then send the result to the filter
in some single sideband phone transmitters?
A. Discriminator
B. Detector
C. IF amplifier
D. Balanced modulator
G7C02 GCLM Page (5 - 9)
Which circuit is used to combine signals from the carrier oscillator and speech amplifier then send the result to the filter
in some single sideband phone transmitters?
A. Discriminator
B. Detector
C. IF amplifier
D. Balanced modulator
(D) G7C02 GCLM Page (5 - 9)
Which of the following is used to process signals from the balanced modulator then send them to the mixer in some single
sideband phone transmitters?
A. Carrier oscillator
B. Filter
C. IF amplifier
D. RF amplifier
G7C01 GCLM Page (5 - 9)
Which of the following is used to process signals from the balanced modulator then send them to the mixer in some single
sideband phone transmitters?
A. Carrier oscillator
B. Filter
C. IF amplifier
D. RF amplifier
(B) G7C01 GCLM Page (5 - 9)
Which of the following describes a linear amplifier?
A. Any RF power amplifier used in conjunction with an amateur transceiver
B. An amplifier in which the output preserves the input waveform
C. A Class C high efficiency amplifier
D. An amplifier used as a frequency multiplier
G7B10 GCLM Page (5 - 9)
Which of the following describes a linear amplifier?
A. Any RF power amplifier used in conjunction with an amateur transceiver
B. An amplifier in which the output preserves the input waveform
C. A Class C high efficiency amplifier
D. An amplifier used as a frequency multiplier
(B) G7B10 GCLM Page (5 - 9)
What is the frequency deviation for a 12.21 MHz reactance modulated oscillator in a 5 kHz deviation, 146.52 MHz FM phone
transmitter?
A. 101.75 Hz
B. 416.7 Hz
C. 5 kHz
D. 60 kHz
G8B07 GCLM Page (5 - 10)
What is the frequency deviation for a 12.21 MHz reactance modulated oscillator in a 5 kHz deviation, 146.52 MHz FM phone
transmitter?
A. 101.75 Hz
B. 416.7 Hz
C. 5 kHz
D. 60 kHz
(B) G8B07 GCLM Page (5 - 10)
What is the total bandwidth of an FM phone transmission having 5 kHz deviation and 3 kHz modulating frequency?
A. 3 kHz
B. 5 kHz
C. 8 kHz
D. 16 kHz
G8B06 GCLM Page (5 - 10)
What is the total bandwidth of an FM phone transmission having 5 kHz deviation and 3 kHz modulating frequency?
A. 3 kHz
B. 5 kHz
C. 8 kHz
D. 16 kHz
(D) G8B06 GCLM Page (5 - 10)
What is the modulation envelope of an AM signal?
A. The waveform created by connecting the peak values of the modulated signal
B. The carrier frequency that contains the signal
C. Spurious signals that envelop nearby frequencies
D. The bandwidth of the modulated signal
G8A11 GCLM Page (5 - 10)
What is the modulation envelope of an AM signal?
A. The waveform created by connecting the peak values of the modulated signal
B. The carrier frequency that contains the signal
C. Spurious signals that envelop nearby frequencies
D. The bandwidth of the modulated signal
(A) G8A11 GCLM Page (5 - 10)
What is meant by the term “flat-topping,” when referring to a single sideband phone transmission?
A. Signal distortion caused by insufficient collector current
B. The transmitter’s automatic level control (ALC) is properly adjusted
C. Signal distortion caused by excessive drive
D. The transmitter’s carrier is properly suppressed
G8A10 GCLM Page (5 - 10)
What is meant by the term “flat-topping,” when referring to a single sideband phone transmission?
A. Signal distortion caused by insufficient collector current
B. The transmitter’s automatic level control (ALC) is properly adjusted
C. Signal distortion caused by excessive drive
D. The transmitter’s carrier is properly suppressed
(C) G8A10 GCLM Page (5 - 10)
Which of the following is an effect of overmodulation?
A. Insufficient audio
B. Insufficient bandwidth
C. Frequency drift
D. Excessive bandwidth
G8A08 GCLM Page (5 - 11)
Which of the following is an effect of overmodulation?
A. Insufficient audio
B. Insufficient bandwidth
C. Frequency drift
D. Excessive bandwidth
(D) G8A08 GCLM Page (5 - 11)
What control is typically adjusted for proper ALC setting on an amateur single sideband transceiver?
A. The RF clipping level
B. Transmit audio or microphone gain
C. Antenna inductance or capacitance
D. Attenuator level
G2A12 GCLM Page (5 - 11)
What control is typically adjusted for proper ALC setting on an amateur single sideband transceiver?
A. The RF clipping level
B. Transmit audio or microphone gain
C. Antenna inductance or capacitance
D. Attenuator level
(B) G2A12 GCLM Page (5 - 11)
What signals are used to conduct a two-tone test?
A. Two audio signals of the same frequency shifted 90 degrees
B. Two non-harmonically related audio signals
C. Two swept frequency tones
D. Two audio frequency range square wave signals of equal amplitude
G4B07 GCLM Page (5 - 11)
What signals are used to conduct a two-tone test?
A. Two audio signals of the same frequency shifted 90 degrees
B. Two non-harmonically related audio signals
C. Two swept frequency tones
D. Two audio frequency range square wave signals of equal amplitude
(B) G4B07 GCLM Page (5 - 11)
What type of transmitter performance does a two-tone test analyze?
A. Linearity
B. Percentage of suppression of carrier and undesired sideband for SSB
C. Percentage of frequency modulation
D. Percentage of carrier phase shift
G4B15 GCLM Page (5 - 11)
What type of transmitter performance does a two-tone test analyze?
A. Linearity
B. Percentage of suppression of carrier and undesired sideband for SSB
C. Percentage of frequency modulation
D. Percentage of carrier phase shift
(A) G4B15 GCLM Page (5 - 11)
What frequency range is occupied by a 3 kHz LSB signal when the displayed carrier frequency is set to 7.178 MHz?
A. 7.178 to 7.181 MHz
B. 7.178 to 7.184 MHz
C. 7.175 to 7.178 MHz
D. 7.1765 to 7.1795 MHz
G4D08 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
What frequency range is occupied by a 3 kHz LSB signal when the displayed carrier frequency is set to 7.178 MHz?
A. 7.178 to 7.181 MHz
B. 7.178 to 7.184 MHz
C. 7.175 to 7.178 MHz
D. 7.1765 to 7.1795 MHz
(C) G4D08 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
What frequency range is occupied by a 3 kHz USB signal with the displayed carrier frequency set to 14.347 MHz?
A. 14.347 to 14.647 MHz
B. 14.347 to 14.350 MHz
C. 14.344 to 14.347 MHz
D. 14.3455 to 14.3485 MHz
G4D09 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
What frequency range is occupied by a 3 kHz USB signal with the displayed carrier frequency set to 14.347 MHz?
A. 14.347 to 14.647 MHz
B. 14.347 to 14.350 MHz
C. 14.344 to 14.347 MHz
D. 14.3455 to 14.3485 MHz
(B) G4D09 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
How close to the lower edge of the phone segment should your displayed carrier frequency be when using 3 kHz wide LSB?
A. At least 3 kHz above the edge of the segment
B. At least 3 kHz below the edge of the segment
C. At least 1 kHz below the edge of the segment
D. At least 1 kHz above the edge of the segment
G4D10 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
How close to the lower edge of the phone segment should your displayed carrier frequency be when using 3 kHz wide LSB?
A. At least 3 kHz above the edge of the segment
B. At least 3 kHz below the edge of the segment
C. At least 1 kHz below the edge of the segment
D. At least 1 kHz above the edge of the segment
(A) G4D10 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
How close to the upper edge of the phone segment should your displayed carrier frequency be when using 3 kHz wide USB?
A. At least 3 kHz above the edge of the band
B. At least 3 kHz below the edge of the band
C. At least 1 kHz above the edge of the segment
D. At least 1 kHz below the edge of the segment
G4D11 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
How close to the upper edge of the phone segment should your displayed carrier frequency be when using 3 kHz wide USB?
A. At least 3 kHz above the edge of the band
B. At least 3 kHz below the edge of the band
C. At least 1 kHz above the edge of the segment
D. At least 1 kHz below the edge of the segment
(B) G4D11 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
What is the purpose of a speech processor as used in a modern transceiver?
A. Increase the intelligibility of transmitted phone signals during poor conditions
B. Increase transmitter bass response for more natural-sounding SSB signals
C. Prevent distortion of voice signals
D. Decrease high-frequency voice output to prevent out-of-band operation
G4D01 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
What is the purpose of a speech processor as used in a modern transceiver?
A. Increase the intelligibility of transmitted phone signals during poor conditions
B. Increase transmitter bass response for more natural-sounding SSB signals
C. Prevent distortion of voice signals
D. Decrease high-frequency voice output to prevent out-of-band operation
(A) G4D01 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
Which of the following describes how a speech processor affects a transmitted single sideband phone signal?
A. It increases peak power
B. It increases average power
C. It reduces harmonic distortion
D. It reduces intermodulation distortion
G4D02 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
Which of the following describes how a speech processor affects a transmitted single sideband phone signal?
A. It increases peak power
B. It increases average power
C. It reduces harmonic distortion
D. It reduces intermodulation distortion
(B) G4D02 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
Which of the following can be the result of an incorrectly adjusted speech processor?
A. Distorted speech
B. Splatter
C. Excessive background pickup
D. All these choices are correct
G4D03 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
Which of the following can be the result of an incorrectly adjusted speech processor?
A. Distorted speech
B. Splatter
C. Excessive background pickup
D. All these choices are correct
(D) G4D03 GCLM Page (5 - 12)
AMPLIFIERS
G4A04 — What reading on the plate current meter of a vacuum tube RF power amplifier indicates correct adjustment of the plate tuning control?
G4A05 — What is a reason to use Automatic Level Control (ALC) with an RF power amplifier? G4A07 — What condition can lead to permanent damage to a solid-state RF power amplifier? G4A08 — What is the correct adjustment for the load or coupling control of a vacuum tube RF power amplifier? G4A09 — Why is a time delay sometimes included in a transmitter keying circuit? G7B01 — What is the reason for neutralizing the final amplifier stage of a transmitter? G7B02 — Which of these classes of amplifiers has the highest efficiency? G7B08 — How is the efficiency of an RF power amplifier determined? G7B11 — For which of the following modes is a Class C power stage appropriate for amplifying a modulated signal?
How is the efficiency of an RF power amplifier determined?
A. Divide the DC input power by the DC output power
B. Divide the RF output power by the DC input power
C. Multiply the RF input power by the reciprocal of the RF output power
D. Add the RF input power to the DC output power
G7B08 GCLM Page (5 - 14)
How is the efficiency of an RF power amplifier determined?
A. Divide the DC input power by the DC output power
B. Divide the RF output power by the DC input power
C. Multiply the RF input power by the reciprocal of the RF output power
D. Add the RF input power to the DC output power
(B) G7B08 GCLM Page (5 - 14)
For which of the following modes is a Class C power stage appropriate for amplifying a modulated signal?
A. SSB
B. FM
C. AM
D. All these choices are correct
G7B11 GCLM Page (5 - 14)
For which of the following modes is a Class C power stage appropriate for amplifying a modulated signal?
A. SSB
B. FM
C. AM
D. All these choices are correct
(B) G7B11 GCLM Page (5 - 14)
Which of these classes of amplifiers has the highest efficiency?
A. Class A
B. Class B
C. Class AB
D. Class C
G7B02 GCLM Page (5 - 14)
Which of these classes of amplifiers has the highest efficiency?
A. Class A
B. Class B
C. Class AB
D. Class C
(D) G7B02 GCLM Page (5 - 14)
Why is a time delay sometimes included in a transmitter keying circuit?
A. To prevent stations from interfering with one another
B. To allow the transmitter power regulators to charge properly
C. To allow time for transmit-receive changeover operations to complete properly before RF output is allowed
D. To allow time for a warning signal to be sent to other stations
G4A09 GCLM Page (5 - 14)
Why is a time delay sometimes included in a transmitter keying circuit?
A. To prevent stations from interfering with one another
B. To allow the transmitter power regulators to charge properly
C. To allow time for transmit-receive changeover operations to complete properly before RF output is allowed
D. To allow time for a warning signal to be sent to other stations
(C) G4A09 GCLM Page (5 - 14)
What reading on the plate current meter of a vacuum tube RF power amplifier indicates correct adjustment of the plate
tuning control?
A. A pronounced peak
B. A pronounced dip
C. No change will be observed
D. A slow, rhythmic oscillation
G4A04 GCLM Page (5 - 15)
What reading on the plate current meter of a vacuum tube RF power amplifier indicates correct adjustment of the plate
tuning control?
A. A pronounced peak
B. A pronounced dip
C. No change will be observed
D. A slow, rhythmic oscillation
(B) G4A04 GCLM Page (5 - 15)
VIDEO
What is the correct adjustment for the load or coupling control of a vacuum tube RF power amplifier?
A. Minimum SWR on the antenna
B. Minimum plate current without exceeding maximum allowable grid current
C. Highest plate voltage while minimizing grid current
D. Maximum power output without exceeding maximum allowable plate current
G4A08 GCLM Page (5 - 15)
What is the correct adjustment for the load or coupling control of a vacuum tube RF power amplifier?
A. Minimum SWR on the antenna
B. Minimum plate current without exceeding maximum allowable grid current
C. Highest plate voltage while minimizing grid current
D. Maximum power output without exceeding maximum allowable plate current
(D) G4A08 GCLM Page (5 - 15)
What condition can lead to permanent damage to a solid-state RF power amplifier?
A. Insufficient drive power
B. Low input SWR
C. Shorting the input signal to ground
D. Excessive drive power
G4A07 GCLM Page (5 - 15)
What condition can lead to permanent damage to a solid-state RF power amplifier?
A. Insufficient drive power
B. Low input SWR
C. Shorting the input signal to ground
D. Excessive drive power
(D) G4A07 GCLM Page (5 - 15)
What is a reason to use Automatic Level Control (ALC) with an RF power amplifier?
A. To balance the transmitter audio frequency response
B. To reduce harmonic radiation
C. To reduce distortion due to excessive drive
D. To increase overall efficiency
G4A05 GCLM Page (5 - 15)
What is a reason to use Automatic Level Control (ALC) with an RF power amplifier?
A. To balance the transmitter audio frequency response
B. To reduce harmonic radiation
C. To reduce distortion due to excessive drive
D. To increase overall efficiency
(C) G4A05 GCLM Page (5 - 15)
What is the reason for neutralizing the final amplifier stage of a transmitter?
A. To limit the modulation index
B. To eliminate self-oscillations
C. To cut off the final amplifier during standby periods
D. To keep the carrier on frequency
G7B01 GCLM Page (5 - 15)
What is the reason for neutralizing the final amplifier stage of a transmitter?
A. To limit the modulation index
B. To eliminate self-oscillations
C. To cut off the final amplifier during standby periods
D. To keep the carrier on frequency
(B) G7B01 GCLM Page (5 - 15)
5.4 Receivers
G4A01 — What is the purpose of the “notch filter” found on many HF transceivers? G4A02 — What is one advantage of selecting the opposite, or “reverse,” sideband when receiving CW signals on a typical HF transceiver? G4A11 — Which of the following is a use for the IF shift control on a receiver? G4A13 — What is one reason to use the attenuator function that is present on many HF transceivers? G4A16 — How does a noise blanker work? G4A17 — What happens as the noise reduction control level in a receiver is increased? G4C12 — Which of the following is an advantage of a receiver DSP IF filter as compared to an analog filter? G4D04 — How does a signal that reads 20 dB over S9 compare to one that reads S9 on a receiver, assuming a properly calibrated S meter? G4D05 — How does a signal that reads 20 dB over S9 compare to one that reads S9 on a receiver, assuming a properly calibrated S meter? G4D06 — Where is an S meter found? G4D07 — How much must the power output of a transmitter be raised to change the S meter reading on a distant receiver from S8 to S9? G7C03 — What circuit is used to process signals from the RF amplifier and local oscillator then send the result to the IF filter in a superheterodyne
receiver? G7C04 — What circuit is used to combine signals from the IF amplifier and BFO and send the result to the AF amplifier in some single sideband receivers? G7C07 — What is the simplest combination of stages that implement a superheterodyne receiver? G7C08 — What circuit is used in analog FM receivers to convert IF output signals to audio? G8B01 — Which mixer input is varied or tuned to convert signals of different frequencies to an intermediate frequency (IF)? G8B02 — If a receiver mixes a 13.800 MHz VFO with a 14.255 MHz received signal to produce a 455 kHz intermediate frequency (IF) signal, what type of
interference will a 13.345 MHz signal produce in the receiver? G8B09 — Why is it good to match receiver bandwidth to the bandwidth of the operating mode?
What circuit is used to process signals from the RF amplifier and local oscillator then send the result to the IF filter in a
superheterodyne receiver?
A. Balanced modulator
B. IF amplifier
C. Mixer
D. Detector
G7C03 GCLM Page (5 - 16)
What circuit is used to process signals from the RF amplifier and local oscillator then send the result to the IF filter in a
superheterodyne receiver?
A. Balanced modulator
B. IF amplifier
C. Mixer
D. Detector
(C) G7C03 GCLM Page (5 - 16)
Which mixer input is varied or tuned to convert signals of different frequencies to an intermediate frequency (IF)?
A. Image frequency
B. Local oscillator
C. RF input
D. Beat frequency oscillator
G8B01 GCLM Page (5 - 16)
Which mixer input is varied or tuned to convert signals of different frequencies to an intermediate frequency (IF)?
A. Image frequency
B. Local oscillator
C. RF input
D. Beat frequency oscillator
(B) G8B01 GCLM Page (5 - 16)
What is the simplest combination of stages that implement a superheterodyne receiver?
A. RF amplifier, detector, audio amplifier
B. RF amplifier, mixer, IF discriminator
C. HF oscillator, mixer, detector
D. HF oscillator, prescaler, audio amplifier
G7C07 GCLM Page (5 - 16)
What is the simplest combination of stages that implement a superheterodyne receiver?
A. RF amplifier, detector, audio amplifier
B. RF amplifier, mixer, IF discriminator
C. HF oscillator, mixer, detector
D. HF oscillator, prescaler, audio amplifier
(C) G7C07 GCLM Page (5 - 16)
What circuit is used to combine signals from the IF amplifier and BFO and send the result to the AF amplifier in some single
sideband receivers?
A. RF oscillator
B. IF filter
C. Balanced modulator
D. Product detector
G7C04 GCLM Page (5 - 17)
What circuit is used to combine signals from the IF amplifier and BFO and send the result to the AF amplifier in some single
sideband receivers?
A. RF oscillator
B. IF filter
C. Balanced modulator
D. Product detector
(D) G7C04 GCLM Page (5 - 17)
What circuit is used in analog FM receivers to convert IF output signals to audio?
A. Product detector
B. Phase inverter
C. Mixer
D. Discriminator
G7C08 GCLM Page (5 - 18)
What circuit is used in analog FM receivers to convert IF output signals to audio?
A. Product detector
B. Phase inverter
C. Mixer
D. Discriminator
(D) G7C08 GCLM Page (5 - 18)
If a receiver mixes a 13.800 MHz VFO with a 14.255 MHz received signal to produce a 455 kHz intermediate frequency (IF)
signal, what type of interference will a 13.345 MHz signal produce in the receiver?
A. Quadrature noise
B. Image response
C. Mixer interference
D. Intermediate interference
G8B02 GCLM Page (5 - 18)
If a receiver mixes a 13.800 MHz VFO with a 14.255 MHz received signal to produce a 455 kHz intermediate frequency (IF)
signal, what type of interference will a 13.345 MHz signal produce in the receiver?
A. Quadrature noise
B. Image response
C. Mixer interference
D. Intermediate interference
(B) G8B02 GCLM Page (5 - 18)
Why is it good to match receiver bandwidth to the bandwidth of the operating mode?
A. It is required by FCC rules
B. It minimizes power consumption in the receiver
C. It improves impedance matching of the antenna
D. It results in the best signal-to-noise ratio
G8B09 GCLM Page (5 - 18)
Why is it good to match receiver bandwidth to the bandwidth of the operating mode?
A. It is required by FCC rules
B. It minimizes power consumption in the receiver
C. It improves impedance matching of the antenna
D. It results in the best signal-to-noise ratio
(D) G8B09 GCLM Page (5 - 18)
Which of the following is an advantage of a receiver DSP IF filter as compared to an analog filter?
A. A wide range of filter bandwidths and shapes can be created
B. Fewer digital components are required
C. Mixing products are greatly reduced
D. The DSP filter is much more effective at VHF frequencies
G4C12 GCLM Page (5 - 18)
Which of the following is an advantage of a receiver DSP IF filter as compared to an analog filter?
A. A wide range of filter bandwidths and shapes can be created
B. Fewer digital components are required
C. Mixing products are greatly reduced
D. The DSP filter is much more effective at VHF frequencies
(A) G4C12 GCLM Page (5 - 18)
What does an S meter measure?
A. Conductance
B. Impedance
C. Received signal strength
D. Transmitter power output
G4D04 GCLM Page (5 - 19)
What does an S meter measure?
A. Conductance
B. Impedance
C. Received signal strength
D. Transmitter power output
(C) G4D04 GCLM Page (5 - 19)
Where is an S meter found?
A. In a receiver
B. In an SWR bridge
C. In a transmitter
D. In a conductance bridge
G4D06 GCLM Page (5 - 19)
Where is an S meter found?
A. In a receiver
B. In an SWR bridge
C. In a transmitter
D. In a conductance bridge
(A) G4D06 GCLM Page (5 - 19)
How much must the power output of a transmitter be raised to change the S meter reading on a distant receiver from S8 to S9?
A. Approximately 1.5 times
B. Approximately 2 times
C. Approximately 4 times
D. Approximately 8 times
G4D07 GCLM Page (5 - 19)
How much must the power output of a transmitter be raised to change the S meter reading on a distant receiver from S8 to S9?
A. Approximately 1.5 times
B. Approximately 2 times
C. Approximately 4 times
D. Approximately 8 times
(C) G4D07 GCLM Page (5 - 19)
How does a signal that reads 20 dB over S9 compare to one that reads S9 on a receiver, assuming a properly calibrated S meter?
A. It is 10 times less powerful
B. It is 20 times less powerful
C. It is 20 times more powerful
D. It is 100 times more powerful
G4D05 GCLM Page (5 - 19)
How does a signal that reads 20 dB over S9 compare to one that reads S9 on a receiver, assuming a properly calibrated S meter?
A. It is 10 times less powerful
B. It is 20 times less powerful
C. It is 20 times more powerful
D. It is 100 times more powerful
(D) G4D05 GCLM Page (5 - 19)
What is one reason to use the attenuator function that is present on many HF transceivers?
A. To reduce signal overload due to strong incoming signals
B. To reduce the transmitter power when driving a linear amplifier
C. To reduce power consumption when operating from batteries
D. To slow down received CW signals for better copy
G4A13 GCLM Page (5 - 19)
What is one reason to use the attenuator function that is present on many HF transceivers?
A. To reduce signal overload due to strong incoming signals
B. To reduce the transmitter power when driving a linear amplifier
C. To reduce power consumption when operating from batteries
D. To slow down received CW signals for better copy
(A) G4A13 GCLM Page (5 - 19)
What is the purpose of the “notch filter” found on many HF transceivers?
A. To restrict the transmitter voice bandwidth
B. To reduce interference from carriers in the receiver passband
C. To eliminate receiver interference from impulse noise sources
D. To enhance the reception of a specific frequency on a crowded band
G4A01 GCLM Page (5 - 20)
What is the purpose of the “notch filter” found on many HF transceivers?
A. To restrict the transmitter voice bandwidth
B. To reduce interference from carriers in the receiver passband
C. To eliminate receiver interference from impulse noise sources
D. To enhance the reception of a specific frequency on a crowded band
(B) G4A01 GCLM Page (5 - 20)
Which of the following is a use for the IF shift control on a receiver?
A. To avoid interference from stations very close to the receive frequency
B. To change frequency rapidly
C. To permit listening on a different frequency from that on which you are transmitting
D. To tune in stations that are slightly off frequency without changing your transmit frequency
G4A11 GCLM Page (5 - 20)
Which of the following is a use for the IF shift control on a receiver?
A. To avoid interference from stations very close to the receive frequency
B. To change frequency rapidly
C. To permit listening on a different frequency from that on which you are transmitting
D. To tune in stations that are slightly off frequency without changing your transmit frequency
(A) G4A11 GCLM Page (5 - 20)
What is one advantage of selecting the opposite, or “reverse,” sideband when receiving CW signals on a typical HF transceiver?
A. Interference from impulse noise will be eliminated
B. More stations can be accommodated within a given signal passband
C. It may be possible to reduce or eliminate interference from other signals
D. Accidental out-of-band operation can be prevented
G4A02 GCLM Page (5 - 20)
What is one advantage of selecting the opposite, or “reverse,” sideband when receiving CW signals on a typical HF transceiver?
A. Interference from impulse noise will be eliminated
B. More stations can be accommodated within a given signal passband
C. It may be possible to reduce or eliminate interference from other signals
D. Accidental out-of-band operation can be prevented
(C) G4A02 GCLM Page (5 - 20)
How does a noise blanker work?
A. By temporarily increasing received bandwidth
B. By redirecting noise pulses into a filter capacitor
C. By reducing receiver gain during a noise pulse
D. By clipping noise peaks
G4A16 GCLM Page (5 - 20)
How does a noise blanker work?
A. By temporarily increasing received bandwidth
B. By redirecting noise pulses into a filter capacitor
C. By reducing receiver gain during a noise pulse
D. By clipping noise peaks
(C) G4A16 GCLM Page (5 - 20)
What happens as the noise reduction control level in a receiver is increased?
A. Received signals may become distorted
B. Received frequency may become unstable
C. CW signals may become severely attenuated
D. Received frequency may shift several kHz
G4A17 GCLM Page (5 - 20)
What happens as the noise reduction control level in a receiver is increased?
A. Received signals may become distorted
B. Received frequency may become unstable
C. CW signals may become severely attenuated
D. Received frequency may shift several kHz
(A) G4A17 GCLM Page (5 - 20)
5.5 HF Station Installation
G4A15 — Which of the following can be a symptom of transmitted RF being picked up by an audio cable carrying AFSK data signals between a computer and a transceiver?
G4C01 — Which of the following might be useful in reducing RF interference to audio frequency devices? G4C02 — Which of the following could be a cause of interference covering a wide range of frequencies? G4C03 — What sound is heard from an audio device or telephone if there is interference from a nearby single sideband phone transmitter? G4C04 — What is the effect on an audio device when there is interference from a nearby CW transmitter? G4C05 — What might be the problem if you receive an RF burn when touching your equipment while transmitting on an HF band, assuming the equipment is
connected to a ground rod? G4C06 — What effect can be caused by a resonant ground connection? G4C08 — Which of the following would reduce RF interference caused by common-mode current on an audio cable? G4C09 — How can a ground loop be avoided? G4C10 — What could be a symptom of a ground loop somewhere in your station? G4C11 — What technique helps to minimize RF “hot spots” in an amateur station? G4C13 — Why must the metal enclosure of every item of station equipment be grounded? G4E03 — Which of the following direct, fused power connections would be the best for a 100 watt HF mobile installation? G4E04 — Why is it best NOT to draw the DC power for a 100 watt HF transceiver from a vehicle’s auxiliary power socket? G4E05 — Which of the following most limits an HF mobile installation? G4E07 — Which of the following may cause receive interference in an HF radio installed in a vehicle? G6B10 — How does a ferrite bead or core reduce common-mode RF current on the shield of a coaxial cable? G7C06 — What should be the impedance of a low-pass filter as compared to the impedance of the transmission line into which it is inserted? G8B12 — What process combines two signals in a non-linear circuit or connection to produce unwanted spurious outputs?
Which of the following direct, fused power connections would be the best for a 100 watt HF mobile installation?
A. To the battery using heavy-gauge wire
B. To the alternator or generator using heavy-gauge wire
C. To the battery using resistor wire
D. To the alternator or generator using resistor wire
G4E03 GCLM Page (5 - 21)
Which of the following direct, fused power connections would be the best for a 100 watt HF mobile installation?
A. To the battery using heavy-gauge wire
B. To the alternator or generator using heavy-gauge wire
C. To the battery using resistor wire
D. To the alternator or generator using resistor wire
(A) G4E03 GCLM Page (5 - 21)
And, two fuses
Why is it best NOT to draw the DC power for a 100 watt HF transceiver from a vehicle’s auxiliary power socket?
A. The socket is not wired with an RF-shielded power cable
B. The socket’s wiring may be inadequate for the current drawn by the transceiver
C. The DC polarity of the socket is reversed from the polarity of modern HF transceivers
D. Drawing more than 50 watts from this socket could cause the engine to overheat
G4E04 GCLM Page (5 - 21)
Why is it best NOT to draw the DC power for a 100 watt HF transceiver from a vehicle’s auxiliary power socket?
A. The socket is not wired with an RF-shielded power cable
B. The socket’s wiring may be inadequate for the current
drawn by the transceiver
C. The DC polarity of the socket is reversed from the polarity of modern HF transceivers
D. Drawing more than 50 watts from this socket could cause the engine to overheat
(B) G4E04 GCLM Page (5 - 21)
X
Which of the following most limits an HF mobile installation?
A. “Picket fencing”
B. The wire gauge of the DC power line to the transceiver
C. Efficiency of the electrically short antenna
D. FCC rules limiting mobile output power on the 75-meter band
G4E05 GCLM Page (5 - 21)
Which of the following most limits an HF mobile installation?
A. “Picket fencing”
B. The wire gauge of the DC power line to the transceiver
C. Efficiency of the electrically short antenna
D. FCC rules limiting mobile output power on the 75-meter band
(C) G4E05 GCLM Page (5 - 21)
Which of the following may cause receive interference in an HF radio installed in a vehicle?
A. The battery charging system
B. The fuel delivery system
C. The vehicle control computer
D. All these choices are correct
G4E07 GCLM Page (5 - 22)
Which of the following may cause receive interference in an HF radio installed in a vehicle?
A. The battery charging system
B. The fuel delivery system
C. The vehicle control computer
D. All these choices are correct
(D) G4E07 GCLM Page (5 - 22)
Why must the metal enclosure of every item of station equipment be grounded?
A. It prevents a blown fuse in the event of an
internal short circuit
B. It prevents signal overload
C. It ensures that the neutral wire is grounded
D. It ensures that hazardous voltages cannot
appear on the chassis
G4C13 GCLM Page (5 - 22)
Why must the metal enclosure of every item of station equipment be grounded?
A. It prevents a blown fuse in the event of an
internal short circuit
B. It prevents signal overload
C. It ensures that the neutral wire is grounded
D. It ensures that hazardous voltages cannot
appear on the chassis
(D) G4C13 GCLM Page (5 - 22)
Which of the following can be a symptom of transmitted RF being picked up by an audio cable carrying AFSK data signals
between a computer and a transceiver?
A. The VOX circuit does not un-key the transmitter
B. The transmitter signal is distorted
C. Frequent connection timeouts
D. All these choices are correct
G4A15 GCLM Page (5 - 22)
Which of the following can be a symptom of transmitted RF being picked up by an audio cable carrying AFSK data signals
between a computer and a transceiver?
A. The VOX circuit does not un-key the transmitter
B. The transmitter signal is distorted
C. Frequent connection timeouts
D. All these choices are correct
(D) G4A15 GCLM Page (5 - 22)
What technique helps to minimize RF “hot spots” in an amateur station?
A. Building all equipment in a metal enclosure
B. Using surge suppressor power outlets
C. Bonding all equipment enclosures together
D. Low-pass filters on all feed lines
G4C11 GCLM Page (5 - 22)
What technique helps to minimize RF “hot spots” in an amateur station?
A. Building all equipment in a metal enclosure
B. Using surge suppressor power outlets
C. Bonding all equipment enclosures together
D. Low-pass filters on all feed lines
(C) G4C11 GCLM Page (5 - 22)
What might be the problem if you receive an RF burn when touching your equipment while transmitting on an HF band,
assuming the equipment is connected to a ground rod?
A. Flat braid rather than round wire has been used for the ground wire
B. Insulated wire has been used for the ground wire
C. The ground rod is resonant
D. The ground wire has high impedance on that frequency
G4C05 GCLM Page (5 - 23)
What might be the problem if you receive an RF burn when touching your equipment while transmitting on an HF band,
assuming the equipment is connected to a ground rod?
A. Flat braid rather than round wire has been used for the ground wire
B. Insulated wire has been used for the ground wire
C. The ground rod is resonant
D. The ground wire has high impedance on that frequency
(D) G4C05 GCLM Page (5 - 23)
What effect can be caused by a resonant ground connection?
A. Overheating of ground straps
B. Corrosion of the ground rod
C. High RF voltages on the enclosures of station equipment
D. A ground loop
G4C06 GCLM Page (5 - 23)
What effect can be caused by a resonant ground connection?
A. Overheating of ground straps
B. Corrosion of the ground rod
C. High RF voltages on the enclosures of station equipment
D. A ground loop
(C) G4C06 GCLM Page (5 - 23)
What could be a symptom of a ground loop somewhere in your station?
A. You receive reports of “hum” on your station’s transmitted signal
B. The SWR reading for one or more antennas is suddenly very high
C. An item of station equipment starts to draw excessive amounts of current
D. You receive reports of harmonic interference from your station
G4C10 GCLM Page (5 - 23)
What could be a symptom of a ground loop somewhere in your station?
A. You receive reports of “hum” on your station’s transmitted signal
B. The SWR reading for one or more antennas is suddenly very high
C. An item of station equipment starts to draw excessive amounts of current
D. You receive reports of harmonic interference from your station
(A) G4C10 GCLM Page (5 - 23)
How can a ground loop be avoided?
A. Connect all ground conductors in series
B. Connect the AC neutral conductor to the ground wire
C. Avoid using lock washers and star washers when making ground connections
D. Connect all ground conductors to a single point
G4C09 GCLM Page (5 - 23)
How can a ground loop be avoided?
A. Connect all ground conductors in series
B. Connect the AC neutral conductor to the ground wire
C. Avoid using lock washers and star washers when making ground connections
D. Connect all ground conductors to a single point
(D) G4C09 GCLM Page (5 - 23)
What should be the impedance of a low-pass filter as compared to the impedance of the transmission line into which it is
inserted?
A. Substantially higher
B. About the same
C. Substantially lower
D. Twice the transmission line impedance
G7C06 GCLM Page (5 - 23)
What should be the impedance of a low-pass filter as compared to the impedance of the transmission line into which it is
inserted?
A. Substantially higher
B. About the same
C. Substantially lower
D. Twice the transmission line impedance
(B) G7C06 GCLM Page (5 - 23)
What process combines two signals in a non-linear circuit or connection to produce unwanted spurious outputs?
A. Intermodulation
B. Heterodyning
C. Detection
D. Rolloff
G8B12 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
What process combines two signals in a non-linear circuit or connection to produce unwanted spurious outputs?
A. Intermodulation
B. Heterodyning
C. Detection
D. Rolloff
(A) G8B12 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
Which of the following could be a cause of interference covering a wide range of frequencies?
A. Not using a balun or line isolator to feed balanced antennas
B. Lack of rectification of the transmitter’s signal in power conductors
C. Arcing at a poor electrical connection
D. Using a balun to feed an unbalanced antenna
G4C02 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
Which of the following could be a cause of interference covering a wide range of frequencies?
A. Not using a balun or line isolator to feed balanced antennas
B. Lack of rectification of the transmitter’s signal in power conductors
C. Arcing at a poor electrical connection
D. Using a balun to feed an unbalanced antenna
(C) G4C02 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
What is the effect on an audio device when there is interference from a nearby CW transmitter?
A. On-and-off humming or clicking
B. A CW signal at a nearly pure audio frequency
C. A chirpy CW signal
D. Severely distorted audio
G4C04 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
What is the effect on an audio device when there is interference from a nearby CW transmitter?
A. On-and-off humming or clicking
B. A CW signal at a nearly pure audio frequency
C. A chirpy CW signal
D. Severely distorted audio
(A) G4C04 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
What sound is heard from an audio device or telephone if there is interference from a nearby single sideband phone transmitter?
A. A steady hum whenever the transmitter is on the air
B. On-and-off humming or clicking
C. Distorted speech
D. Clearly audible speech
G4C03 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
What sound is heard from an audio device or telephone if there is interference from a nearby single sideband phone transmitter?
A. A steady hum whenever the transmitter is on the air
B. On-and-off humming or clicking
C. Distorted speech
D. Clearly audible speech
(C) G4C03 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
How does a ferrite bead or core reduce common-mode RF current on the shield of a coaxial cable?
A. By creating an impedance in the current’s path
B. It converts common-mode current to differential mode
C. By creating an out-of-phase current to cancel the common-mode current
D. Ferrites expel magnetic fields
G6B10 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
How does a ferrite bead or core reduce common-mode RF current on the shield of a coaxial cable?
A. By creating an impedance in the current’s path
B. It converts common-mode current to differential mode
C. By creating an out-of-phase current to cancel the common-mode current
D. Ferrites expel magnetic fields
(A) G6B10 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
Which of the following would reduce RF interference caused by common-mode current on an audio cable?
A. Placing a ferrite choke around the cable
B. Adding series capacitors to the conductors
C. Adding shunt inductors to the conductors
D. Adding an additional insulating jacket to the cable
G4C08 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
Which of the following would reduce RF interference caused by common-mode current on an audio cable?
A. Placing a ferrite choke around the cable
B. Adding series capacitors to the conductors
C. Adding shunt inductors to the conductors
D. Adding an additional insulating jacket to the cable
(A) G4C08 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
Which of the following might be useful in reducing RF interference to audio frequency devices?
A. Bypass inductor
B. Bypass capacitor
C. Forward-biased diode
D. Reverse-biased diode
G4C01 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
Which of the following might be useful in reducing RF interference to audio frequency devices?
A. Bypass inductor
B. Bypass capacitor
C. Forward-biased diode
D. Reverse-biased diode
(B) G4C01 GCLM Page (5 - 24)
Course Overview
IntroductionProcedures and Practices
Rules and RegulationsComponents and Circuits
Radio Signals and EquipmentDigital Modes
AntennasPropagation
Electrical and RF Safety
6.1 Basics of Digital Modes
G2E04 — What segment of the 20-meter band is most often used for digital transmissions (avoiding the DX propagation beacons)?
G2E07 — What segment of the 80-meter band is most commonly used for digital transmissions? G2E08 — In what segment of the 20-meter band are most PSK31 operations commonly found? G8A01 — How is an FSK signal generated? G8C11 — How are the two separate frequencies of a Frequency Shift Keyed (FSK)
signal identified?
What segment of the 20-meter band is most often used for digital transmissions (avoiding the DX propagation beacons)?
A. 14.000 - 14.050 MHz
B. 14.070 - 14.112 MHz
C. 14.150 - 14.225 MHz
D. 14.275 - 14.350 MHz
G2E04 GCLM Page (6 - 2)
What segment of the 20-meter band is most often used for digital transmissions (avoiding the DX propagation beacons)?
A. 14.000 - 14.050 MHz
B. 14.070 - 14.112 MHz
C. 14.150 - 14.225 MHz
D. 14.275 - 14.350 MHz
(B) G2E04 GCLM Page (6 - 2)
20 Meters (14.0 - 14.35):
14.070 - 14.095 RTTY14.095 - 14.0995 Packet14.100 NCDXF Beacons14.1005 - 14.112 Packet14.230 SSTV14.286 AM calling frequency
In what segment of the 20-meter band are most PSK31 operations commonly found?
A. At the bottom of the slow-scan TV segment, near 14.230 MHz
B. At the top of the SSB phone segment, near 14.325 MHz
C. In the middle of the CW segment, near 14.100 MHz
D. Below the RTTY segment, near 14.070 MHz
G2E08 GCLM Page (6 - 2)
In what segment of the 20-meter band are most PSK31 operations commonly found?
A. At the bottom of the slow-scan TV segment, near 14.230 MHz
B. At the top of the SSB phone segment, near 14.325 MHz
C. In the middle of the CW segment, near 14.100 MHz
D. Below the RTTY segment, near 14.070 MHz
(D) G2E08 GCLM Page (6 - 2)
What segment of the 80-meter band is most commonly used for digital transmissions?
A. 3570 – 3600 kHz
B. 3500 – 3525 kHz
C. 3700 – 3750 kHz
D. 3775 – 3825 kHz
G2E07 GCLM Page (6 - 2)
What segment of the 80-meter band is most commonly used for digital transmissions?
A. 3570 – 3600 kHz
B. 3500 – 3525 kHz
C. 3700 – 3750 kHz
D. 3775 – 3825 kHz
(A) G2E07 GCLM Page (6 - 2)
How are the two separate frequencies of a Frequency Shift Keyed (FSK) signal identified?
A. Dot and dash
B. On and off
C. High and low
D. Mark and space
G8C11 GCLM Page (6 - 4)
How are the two separate frequencies of a Frequency Shift Keyed (FSK) signal identified?
A. Dot and dash
B. On and off
C. High and low
D. Mark and space
(D) G8C11 GCLM Page (6 - 4)
How is an FSK signal generated?
A. By keying an FM transmitter with a sub-audible tone
B. By changing an oscillator’s frequency directly with a digital control signal
C. By using a transceiver’s computer data interface protocol to change frequencies
D. By reconfiguring the CW keying input to act as a tone generator
G8A01 GCLM Page (6 - 4)
How is an FSK signal generated?
A. By keying an FM transmitter with a sub-audible tone
B. By changing an oscillator’s frequency directly with a digital control signal
C. By using a transceiver’s computer data interface protocol to change frequencies
D. By reconfiguring the CW keying input to act as a tone generator
(B) G8A01 GCLM Page (6 - 4)
6.2 Character-Based Modes
G2E06 — What is the most common frequency shift for RTTY emissions in the amateur HF bands? G8A06 — Which of the following is characteristic of QPSK31? G8C04 — Which of the following describes Baudot code? G8C08 — Which of the following statements is true about PSK31? G8C09 — What does the number 31 represent in “PSK31”? G8C12 — Which type of code is used for sending characters in a PSK31 signal?
Which of the following describes Baudot code?
A. A 7-bit code with start, stop, and parity bits
B. A code using error detection and correction
C. A 5-bit code with additional start and stop bits
D. A code using SELCAL and LISTEN
G8C04 GCLM Page (6 - 5)
Which of the following describes Baudot code?
A. A 7-bit code with start, stop, and parity bits
B. A code using error detection and correction
C. A 5-bit code with additional start and stop bits
D. A code using SELCAL and LISTEN
(C) G8C04 GCLM Page (6 - 5)
What is the most common frequency shift for RTTY emissions in the amateur HF bands?
A. 85 Hz
B. 170 Hz
C. 425 Hz
D. 850 Hz
G2E06 GCLM Page (6 - 5)
What is the most common frequency shift for RTTY emissions in the amateur HF bands?
A. 85 Hz
B. 170 Hz
C. 425 Hz
D. 850 HzSpace Mark
2295Hz – 2125 Hz = 170Hz
(B) G2E06 GCLM Page (6 - 5)
RY (test signal)From Wikipedia, the free encyclopediaRY test pattern in 5-level ITA2 codeRYRYRYRY... is a character string that was widely used to test a five-level teleprinter or RTTY channel. The characters R and Y are "01010" and "10101" in 5-bit ITA2 code, also known as Baudot. Thus they are Boolean complements of each other.Switching between the two characters is a stressful test for electromechanical teleprinters.[1] Repeated over and over, RYRYRYRY... outputs a carrier wave that regularly and rapidly shifts back and forth in frequency.This signal pattern also provided a test for signal polarity; if polarity was reversed, the test signal would print as "SG".[2]
The corresponding string of complementary characters in 7-bit ASCII is U*U*U*U*...The RYRYRY sequence usage can be seen on the following DDH47 weather station broadcast excerpt:
CQ CQ CQ DE DDH47 DDH9 DDH8 FREQUENCIES 147.3 kHz 11039 kHz 14467.3 kHz
RYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRY
CQ CQ CQ DE DDH47 DDH9 DDH8 FREQUENCIES 147.3 kHz 11039 kHz 14467.3 kHz
RYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRY
CQ CQ CQ DE DDH47 DDH9 DDH8 FREQUENCIES 147.3 kHz 11039 kHz 14467.3 kHz
RYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRYRY
ZCZC 643
WWXX60 EDZW 150900
NAUTISCHE WARNNACHRICHTEN VOM 15.09.2017 UM 09 UTC
STRONG WIND GALE STORM WARNINGS FOR GERMAN BIGHT AND BALTIC SEA
STARK WIND STURMWARNUNGEN FUER NORD UND OSTSEE
NO WARNINGS IN FORCE
KEINE WARNUNGEN IN KRAFT
References:
1. An Introduction to Amateur Radioteletype p.10 Archived 2009-03-20 at the Wayback Machine
2. Digital Signal Types
Categories:
• History of telecommunications
• Test items
What does the number 31 represent in “PSK31”?
A. The approximate transmitted symbol rate
B. The version of the PSK protocol
C. The year in which PSK31 was invented
D. The number of characters that can be represented by PSK31
G8C09 GCLM Page (6 - 5)
What does the number 31 represent in “PSK31”?
A. The approximate transmitted symbol rate
B. The version of the PSK protocol
C. The year in which PSK31 was invented
D. The number of characters that can be
represented by PSK31
(A) G8C09 GCLM Page (6 - 5)
Which of the following is characteristic of QPSK31?
A. It is sideband sensitive
B. Its encoding provides error correction
C. Its bandwidth is approximately the same as BPSK31
D. All these choices are correct
G8A06 GCLM Page (6 - 5)
Which of the following is characteristic of QPSK31?
A. It is sideband sensitive
B. Its encoding provides error correction
C. Its bandwidth is approximately the same as BPSK31
D. All these choices are correct
(D) G8A06 GCLM Page (6 - 5)
Which type of code is used for sending characters in a PSK31 signal?
A. Varicode
B. Viterbi
C. Volumetric
D. Binary
G8C12 GCLM Page (6 - 5)
The Varicode character set is shown following, starting with NUL and ending with DEL. The codes are transmitted left bit first, with 0 representing a phase reversal on BPSK and 1 representing a steady carrier. A minimum of two zeros is inserted between characters. Some implementations may not handle all the codes below 32. Note that the lower-case letters have the shortest patterns and so are the fastest to transmit.
NUL 1010101011 DLE 1011110111
SOH 1011011011 DCI 1011110101
STX 1011101101 DC2 1110101101
ETX 1101110111 DC3 1110101111
EOT 1011101011 DC4 1101011011
ENQ 1101011111 NAK 1101101011
ACK 1011101111 SYN 1101101101
BEL 1011111101 ETB 1101010111
BS 1011111111 CAN 1101111011
HT 11101111 EM 1101111101
LF 11101 SUB 1110110111
VT 1101101111 ESC 1101010101
FF 1011011101 FS 1101011101
CR 11111 GS 1110111011
SO 1101110101 RS 1011111011
SI 1110101011 US 1101111111
SP 1 C 10101101
! 111111111 D 10110101
" 101011111 E 1110111
# 111110101 F 11011011
$ 111011011 G 11111101
% 1011010101 H 101010101
& 1010111011 I 1111111
101111111 J 111111101
( 11111011 K 101111101
) 11110111 L 11010111
* 101101111 M 10111011
+ 111011111 N 11011101
, 1110101 O 10101011
- 110101 P 11010101
. 1010111 Q 111011101
/ 110101111 R 10101111
0 10110111 S 1101111
1 10111101 T 1101101
2 11101101 U 101010111
3 11111111 V 110110101
W 101011101
4 101110111 X 101110101
5 101011011 Y 101111011
6 101101011 Z 101111011
7 110101101 [ 1010101101
8 110101011 \ 111110111
9 110110111 ] 111101111
: 11110101 ^ 111111011
; 110111101 _ 1010111111
< 111101101 . 101101101
= 1010101 / 1011011111
> 111010111 a 1011
? 1010101111 b 1011111
@ 1010111101 c 101111
A 1111101 d 101101
B 11101011 e 11
f 111101 s 10111
g 1011011 t 101
h 101011 u 110111
i 1101 v 1111011
j 111101011 w 1101011
k 10111111 x 11011111
l 11011 y 1011101
m 111011 z 111010101
n 1111 1010110111
o 111 | 110111011
p 1111111 1010110101
q 110111111 ~ 1011010111
r 10101 DEL 1110110101
Which type of code is used for sending characters in a PSK31 signal?
A. Varicode
B. Viterbi
C. Volumetric
D. Binary
(A) G8C12 GCLM Page (6 - 5)
Which of the following statements is true about PSK31?
A. Upper case letters are sent with more power
B. Upper case letters use longer Varicode bit sequences and thus slow down transmission
C. Error correction is used to ensure accurate message reception
D. Higher power is needed as compared to RTTY for similar error rates
G8C08 GCLM Page (6 - 6)
Which of the following statements is true about PSK31?
A. Upper case letters are sent with more power
B. Upper case letters use longer Varicode bit sequences and thus slow down transmission
C. Error correction is used to ensure accurate message reception
D. Higher power is needed as compared to RTTY for similar error rates
(B) G8C08 GCLM Page (6 - 6)
6.3 Packet-Based Modes and Systems
G2E02 — How can a PACTOR modem or controller be used to determine if the channel is in use by other PACTOR stations? G2E09 — How do you join a contact between two stations using the PACTOR protocol? G2E11 — Which of the following is characteristic of the FT8 mode? G2E13 — Which communication system sometimes uses the internet to transfer messages? G2E15 — Which of the following is a requirement when using the FT8 digital mode? G8A09 — What type of modulation is used by the FT8 digital mode? G8A12 — Which of the following narrow-band digital modes can receive signals with very low signal-to-noise ratios? G8C02 — Which digital mode is used as a low-power beacon for assessing HF propagation? G8C03 — What part of a packet radio frame contains the routing and handling information? G8C05 — In the PACTOR protocol, what is meant by a NAK response to a transmitted packet? G8C07 — How does the receiving station respond to an ARQ data mode packet containing errors? G8C10 — How does forward error correction (FEC) allow the receiver to correct errors in received data packets?
Which of the following is a requirement when using the FT8 digital mode?
A. A special hardware modem
B. Computer time accurate within approximately 1 second
C. Receiver attenuator set to -12 dB
D. A vertically polarized antenna
G2E15 GCLM Page (6 - 6)
Which of the following is a requirement when using the FT8 digital mode?
A. A special hardware modem
B. Computer time accurate within approximately 1 second
C. Receiver attenuator set to -12 dB
D. A vertically polarized antenna
(B) G2E15 GCLM Page (6 - 6)
What part of a packet radio frame contains the routing and handling information?
A. Directory
B. Preamble
C. Header
D. Footer
G8C03 GCLM Page (6 - 7)
What part of a packet radio frame contains the routing and handling information?
A. Directory
B. Preamble
C. Header
D. Footer
(C) G8C03 GCLM Page (6 - 7)
How does forward error correction (FEC) allow the receiver to correct errors in received data packets?
A. By controlling transmitter output power for optimum signal strength
B. By using the Varicode character set
C. By transmitting redundant information with the data
D. By using a parity bit with each character
G8C10 GCLM Page (6 - 7)
How does forward error correction (FEC) allow the receiver to correct errors in received data packets?
A. By controlling transmitter output power for optimum signal strength
B. By using the Varicode character set
C. By transmitting redundant information with the data
D. By using a parity bit with each character
(C) G8C10 GCLM Page (6 - 7)
In the PACTOR protocol, what is meant by a NAK response to a transmitted packet?
A. The receiver is requesting the packet be retransmitted
B. The receiver is reporting the packet was received without error
C. The receiver is busy decoding the packet
D. The entire file has been received correctly
G8C05 GCLM Page (6 - 7)
In the PACTOR protocol, what is meant by a NAK response to a transmitted packet?
A. The receiver is requesting the packet be retransmitted
B. The receiver is reporting the packet was received without error
C. The receiver is busy decoding the packet
D. The entire file has been received correctly
(A) G8C05 GCLM Page (6 - 7)
How does the receiving station respond to an ARQ data mode packet containing errors?
A. It terminates the contact
B. It requests the packet be retransmitted
C. It sends the packet back to the transmitting station
D. It requests a change in transmitting protocol
G8C07 GCLM Page (6 - 7)
How does the receiving station respond to an ARQ data mode packet containing errors?
A. It terminates the contact
B. It requests the packet be retransmitted
C. It sends the packet back to the transmitting station
D. It requests a change in transmitting protocol
(B) G8C07 GCLM Page (6 - 7)
How do you join a contact between two stations using the PACTOR protocol?
A. Send broadcast packets containing your call sign while in MONITOR mode
B. Transmit a steady carrier until the PACTOR protocol times out and disconnects
C. Joining an existing contact is not possible, PACTOR connections are limited to two stations
D. Send a NAK response continuously so that the sending station must stand by
G2E09 GCLM Page (6 - 7)
How do you join a contact between two stations using the PACTOR protocol?
A. Send broadcast packets containing your call sign while in MONITOR mode
B. Transmit a steady carrier until the PACTOR protocol times out and disconnects
C. Joining an existing contact is not possible, PACTOR connections are limited to two stations
D. Send a NAK response continuously so that the sending station must stand by
(C) G2E09 GCLM Page (6 - 7)
How can a PACTOR modem or controller be used to determine if the channel is in use by other PACTOR stations?
A. Unplug the data connector temporarily and see if the channel-busy indication is turned off
B. Put the modem or controller in a mode which allows monitoring communications without a connection
C. Transmit UI packets several times and wait to see if there is a response from another PACTOR station
D. Send the message, ”Is this frequency in use?”G2E02 GCLM Page (6 - 7)
How can a PACTOR modem or controller be used to determine if the channel is in use by other PACTOR stations?
A. Unplug the data connector temporarily and see if the channel-busy indication is turned off
B. Put the modem or controller in a mode which allows monitoring communications without a connection
C. Transmit UI packets several times and wait to see if there is a response from another PACTOR station
D. Send the message, ”Is this frequency in use?”(B) G2E02 GCLM Page (6 - 7)
Which communication system sometimes uses the internet to transfer messages?
A. Winlink
B. RTTY
C. ARES
D. SKYWARN
G2E13 GCLM Page (6 - 8)
Which communication system sometimes uses the internet to transfer messages?
A. Winlink
B. RTTY
C. ARES
D. SKYWARN
(A) G2E13 GCLM Page (6 - 8)
What type of modulation is used by the FT8 digital mode?
A. 8-tone frequency shift keying
B. Vestigial sideband
C. Amplitude compressed AM
D. Direct sequence spread spectrum
G8A09 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
What type of modulation is used by the FT8 digital mode?
A. 8-tone frequency shift keying
B. Vestigial sideband
C. Amplitude compressed AM
D. Direct sequence spread spectrum
(A) G8A09 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
Which of the following narrow-band digital modes can receive signals with very low signal-to-noise ratios?
A. MSK144
B. FT8
C. AMTOR
D. MFSK32
G8A12 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
Which of the following narrow-band digital modes can receive signals with very low signal-to-noise ratios?
A. MSK144
B. FT8
C. AMTOR
D. MFSK32
(B) G8A12 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
Which of the following is characteristic of the FT8 mode of the WSJT-X family?
A. It is a keyboard-to-keyboard chat mode
B. Each transmission takes exactly 60 seconds
C. It is limited to use on VHF
D. Typical exchanges are limited to call signs,
grid locators, and signal reports
G2E11 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
Which of the following is characteristic of the FT8 mode of the WSJT-X family?
A. It is a keyboard-to-keyboard chat mode
B. Each transmission takes exactly 60 seconds
C. It is limited to use on VHF
D. Typical exchanges are limited to call signs,
grid locators, and signal reports
(D) G2E11 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
Which digital mode is used as a low-power beacon for assessing HF propagation?
A. WSPR
B. Olivia
C. PSK31
D. SSB-SC
G8C02 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
My station transmitting a WSPR Beacon.
These are some of the WSPR stations that my station is receiving.
WSPR is a mode that is part of the WSJT-X Family.
WSPR stands for Weak Signal Propagation Reporting
After you transmit your beacon via the WSPR mode of the WSJT-X Family,Go to this website wsprnet.org.After the band, your call, and coordinates are entered, clicking update gives this result.Clicking on your callsign spot shows what stations are hearing you, and what stations you are hearing.This is a great way to check propagation on whatever band you choose. This shows my propagation on 20 meters at night.
These are wide shots of the previous screenshot showing how far away my station is being heard.
WOW! As far away as New Zealand!
Which digital mode is used as a low-power beacon for assessing HF propagation?
A. WSPR
B. Olivia
C. PSK31
D. SSB-SC
(A) G8C02 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
6.4 Receiving and Transmitting Digital Modes
G2E01 — Which mode is normally used when sending RTTY signals via AFSK with an SSB transmitter? G2E05 — What is the standard sideband used to generate a JT65, JT9, or FT8 digital signal when using AFSK in any amateur
band? G2E14 — What could be wrong if you cannot decode an RTTY or other FSK signal even though it is apparently tuned in properly? G4A14 — What is likely to happen if a transceiver’s ALC system is not set properly when transmitting AFSK signals with the radio
using single sideband mode? G8B05 — What is the approximate bandwidth of a PACTOR-III signal at maximum data rate? G8B08 — Why is it important to know the duty cycle of the mode you are using when transmitting? G8B10 — What is the relationship between transmitted symbol rate and bandwidth? G8C13 — What is indicated on a waterfall display by one or more vertical lines on either side of a digital signal?
Which mode is normally used when sending RTTY signals via AFSK with an SSB transmitter?
A. USB
B. DSB
C. CW
D. LSB
G2E01 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
Which mode is normally used when sending RTTY signals via AFSK with an SSB transmitter?
A. USB
B. DSB
C. CW
D. LSB
(D) G2E01 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
What is the standard sideband used to generate a JT65, JT9, or FT8 digital signal when using AFSK in any amateur band?
A. LSB
B. USB
C. DSB
D. SSB
G2E05 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
What is the standard sideband used to generate a JT65, JT9, or FT8 digital signal when using AFSK in any amateur band?
A. LSB
B. USB
C. DSB
D. SSB
(B) G2E05 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
What could be wrong if you cannot decode an RTTY or other FSK signal even though it is apparently tuned in properly?
A. The mark and space frequencies may be reversed
B. You may have selected the wrong baud rate
C. You may be listening on the wrong sideband
D. All these choices are correct
G2E14 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
What could be wrong if you cannot decode an RTTY or other FSK signal even though it is apparently tuned in properly?
A. The mark and space frequencies may be reversed
B. You may have selected the wrong baud rate
C. You may be listening on the wrong sideband
D. All these choices are correct
(D) G2E14 GCLM Page (6 - 9)
What is the relationship between transmitted symbol rate and bandwidth?
A. Symbol rate and bandwidth are not related
B. Higher symbol rates require wider bandwidth
C. Lower symbol rates require wider bandwidth
D. Bandwidth is always half the symbol rate
G8B10 GCLM Page (6 - 10)
What is the relationship between transmitted symbol rate and bandwidth?
A. Symbol rate and bandwidth are not related
B. Higher symbol rates require wider bandwidth
C. Lower symbol rates require wider bandwidth
D. Bandwidth is always half the symbol rate
(B) G8B10 GCLM Page (6 - 10)
What is the approximate bandwidth of a PACTOR-III signal at maximum data rate?
A. 31.5 Hz
B. 500 Hz
C. 1800 Hz
D. 2300 Hz
G8B05 GCLM Page (6 - 10)
What is the approximate bandwidth of a PACTOR-III signal at maximum data rate?
A. 31.5 Hz
B. 500 Hz
C. 1800 Hz
D. 2300 Hz
(D) G8B05 GCLM Page (6 - 10)
Why is it important to know the duty cycle of the mode you are using when transmitting?
A. To aid in tuning your transmitter
B. Some modes have high duty cycles that could exceed the transmitter’s average power rating
C. To allow time for the other station to break in during a transmission
D. The attenuator will have to be adjusted accordingly
G8B08 GCLM Page (6 - 10)
Why is it important to know the duty cycle of the mode you are using when transmitting?
A. To aid in tuning your transmitter
B. Some modes have high duty cycles that could exceed the transmitter’s average power rating
C. To allow time for the other station to break in during a transmission
D. The attenuator will have to be adjusted accordingly
(B) G8B08 GCLM Page (6 - 10)
What is indicated on a waterfall display by one or more vertical lines on either side of a digital signal?
A. Long path propagation
B. Backscatter propagation
C. Insufficient modulation
D. Overmodulation
G8C13 GCLM Page (6 - 11)
What is indicated on a waterfall display by one or more vertical lines on either side of a digital signal?
A. Long path propagation
B. Backscatter propagation
C. Insufficient modulation
D. Overmodulation
(D) G8C13 GCLM Page (6 - 11)
What is likely to happen if a transceiver’s ALC system is not set properly when transmitting AFSK signals with the radio using
single sideband mode?
A. ALC will invert the modulation of the AFSK mode
B. Improper action of ALC distorts the signal and can cause spurious emissions
C. When using digital modes, too much ALC activity can cause the transmitter to overheat
D. All these choices are correct
G4A14 GCLM Page (6 - 11)
What is likely to happen if a transceiver’s ALC system is not set properly when transmitting AFSK signals with the radio using
single sideband mode?
A. ALC will invert the modulation of the AFSK mode
B. Improper action of ALC distorts the signal and can cause spurious emissions
C. When using digital modes, too much ALC activity can cause the transmitter to overheat
D. All these choices are correct
(B) G4A14 GCLM Page (6 - 11)
6.5 Digital Operating Procedures
G1E03 — What is required to conduct communications with a digital station operating under automatic control outside the automatic control band segments?
G1E09 — Under what circumstances are messages that are sent via digital modes exempt from Part 97 third-party rules that apply to other modes of communication?
G1E11 — On what bands may automatically controlled stations transmitting RTTY or data emissions communicate with other automatically controlled digital stations?
G2E03 — What symptoms may result from other signals interfering with a PACTOR or WINMOR transmission? G2E10 — Which of the following is a way to establish contact with a digital messaging system gateway station? G8C06 — What action results from a failure to exchange information due to excessive transmission attempts when using PACTOR
or WINMOR? G8C14 — Which of the following describes a waterfall display?
Which of the following is a way to establish contact with a digital messaging system gateway station?
A. Send an email to the system control operator
B. Send QRL in Morse code
C. Respond when the station broadcasts its SSID
D. Transmit a connect message on the station’s published frequency
G2E10 GCLM Page (6 - 12)
Which of the following is a way to establish contact with a digital messaging system gateway station?
A. Send an email to the system control operator
B. Send QRL in Morse code
C. Respond when the station broadcasts its SSID
D. Transmit a connect message on the station’s published frequency
(D) G2E10 GCLM Page (6 - 12)
On what bands may automatically controlled stations transmitting RTTY or data emissions communicate with other
automatically controlled digital stations?
A. On any band segment where digital operation is permitted
B. Anywhere in the non-phone segments of the 10-meter or shorter wavelength bands
C. Only in the non-phone Extra Class segments of the bands
D. Anywhere in the 6 meter or shorter wavelength bands, and in limited segments of some of the HF bands
FCC Rule: [97.221, 97.305] G1E11 GCLM Page (6 - 13)
On what bands may automatically controlled stations transmitting RTTY or data emissions communicate with other
automatically controlled digital stations?
A. On any band segment where digital operation is permitted
B. Anywhere in the non-phone segments of the 10-meter or shorter wavelength bands
C. Only in the non-phone Extra Class segments of the bands
D. Anywhere in the 6 meter or shorter wavelength bands, and in limited segments of some of the HF bands
(D) FCC Rule: [97.221, 97.305] G1E11 GCLM Page (6 - 13)
What is required to conduct communications with a digital station operating under automatic control outside the automatic
control band segments?
A. The station initiating the contact must be under local or remote controlB. The interrogating transmission must be made by another automatically controlled
stationC. No third-party traffic may be transmittedD. The control operator of the interrogating station must hold an Amateur Extra Class
license FCC Rule: [97.221] G1E03 GCLM Page (6 - 13)
What is required to conduct communications with a digital station operating under automatic control outside the automatic
control band segments?
A. The station initiating the contact must be under local or remote controlB. The interrogating transmission must be made by another automatically controlled
stationC. No third-party traffic may be transmittedD. The control operator of the interrogating station must hold an Amateur Extra Class
license (A) FCC Rule: [97.221] G1E03 GCLM Page (6 - 13)
Which of the following describes a waterfall display?
A. Frequency is horizontal, signal strength is vertical, time is intensity
B. Frequency is vertical, signal strength is intensity, time is horizontal
C. Frequency is horizontal, signal strength is intensity, time is vertical
D. Frequency is vertical, signal strength is horizontal, time is intensity
G8C14 GCLM Page (6 - 13)
Which of the following describes a waterfall display?A. Frequency is horizontal, signal strength is
vertical, time is intensity
B. Frequency is vertical, signal strength is intensity, time is horizontal
C. Frequency is horizontal, signal strength is intensity, time is vertical
D. Frequency is vertical, signal strength is horizontal, time is intensity
(C) G8C14 GCLM Page (6 - 13)
Under what circumstances are messages that are sent via digital modes exempt from Part 97 third-party rules that apply to other
modes of communication?
A. Under no circumstances
B. When messages are encrypted
C. When messages are not encrypted
D. When under automatic control
FCC Rule: [97.115] G1E09 GCLM Page (6 - 14)
Under what circumstances are messages that are sent via digital modes exempt from Part 97 third-party rules that apply to other
modes of communication?
A. Under no circumstances
B. When messages are encrypted
C. When messages are not encrypted
D. When under automatic control
(A) FCC Rule: [97.115] G1E09 GCLM Page (6 - 14)
What symptoms may result from other signals interfering with a PACTOR or WINMOR transmission?
A. Frequent retries or timeouts
B. Long pauses in message transmission
C. Failure to establish a connection between stations
D. All these choices are correct
G2E03 GCLM Page (6 - 14)
What symptoms may result from other signals interfering with a PACTOR or WINMOR transmission?
A. Frequent retries or timeouts
B. Long pauses in message transmission
C. Failure to establish a connection between stations
D. All these choices are correct
(D) G2E03 GCLM Page (6 - 14)
What action results from a failure to exchange information due to excessive transmission attempts when using PACTOR or
WINMOR?
A. The checksum overflows
B. The connection is dropped
C. Packets will be routed incorrectly
D. Encoding reverts to the default character set
G8C06 GCLM Page (6 - 14)
What action results from a failure to exchange information due to excessive transmission attempts when using PACTOR or
WINMOR?
A. The checksum overflows
B. The connection is dropped
C. Packets will be routed incorrectly
D. Encoding reverts to the default character set
(B) G8C06 GCLM Page (6 - 14)
Course Overview
IntroductionProcedures and Practices
Rules and RegulationsComponents and Circuits
Radio Signals and EquipmentDigital Modes
AntennasPropagation
Electrical and RF Safety
7.1 Dipoles and Ground-planes
G4E01 — What is the purpose of a capacitance hat on a mobile antenna? G4E02 — What is the purpose of a corona ball on an HF mobile antenna? G4E06 — What is one disadvantage of using a shortened mobile antenna as opposed to a full size antenna? G9B02 — Which of the following is a common way to adjust the feed-point impedance of a quarter wave ground-plane vertical antenna to be approximately 50 ohms? G9B03 — Which of the following best describes the radiation pattern of a quarter-wave, ground-plane vertical antenna? G9B04 — What is the radiation pattern of a dipole antenna in free space in a plane containing the conductor? G9B05 — How does antenna height affect the horizontal (azimuthal) radiation pattern of a horizontal dipole HF antenna? G9B06 — Where should the radial wires of a ground-mounted vertical antenna system be placed? G9B07 — How does the feed-point impedance of a 1⁄2 wave dipole antenna change as the antenna is lowered below 1⁄4 wave above ground? G9B08 — How does the feed point impedance of a 1⁄2 wave dipole change as the feed point is moved from the center toward the ends? G9B09 — Which of the following is an advantage of a horizontally polarized as compared to a vertically polarized HF antenna? G9B10 — What is the approximate length for a 1⁄2 wave dipole antenna cut for 14.250 MHz? G9B11 — What is the approximate length for a 1⁄2 wave dipole antenna cut for 3.550 MHz? G9B12 — What is the approximate length for a 1⁄4 wave vertical antenna cut for 28.5 MHz? G9C04 — How does antenna gain stated in dBi compare to gain stated in dBd for the same antenna? G9C15 — What is meant by the terms dBi and dBd when referring to antenna gain? G9D01 — Which of the following antenna types will be most effective as a Near Vertical Incidence Sky Wave (NVIS) antenna for short-skip communications on 40
meters during the day? G9D02 — What is the feed-point impedance of an end-fed half-wave antenna? G9D08 — How does a “screwdriver” mobile antenna adjust its feed-point impedance? G9D12 — What is the common name of a dipole with a single central support?
What is the radiation pattern of a dipole antenna in free space in a plane containing the conductor?
A. It is a figure-eight at right angles to the antenna
B. It is a figure-eight off both ends of the antenna
C. It is a circle (equal radiation in all directions)
D. It has a pair of lobes on one side of the antenna and a single lobe on the other side
G9B04 GCLM Page (7 - 2)
What is the radiation pattern of a dipole antenna in free space in a plane containing the conductor?
A. It is a figure-eight at right angles to the antenna
B. It is a figure-eight off both ends of the antenna
C. It is a circle (equal radiation in all directions)
D. It has a pair of lobes on one side of the antenna and a single lobe on the other side
(A) G9B04 GCLM Page (7 - 2)
How does antenna gain stated in dBi compare to gain stated in dBd for the same antenna?
A. dBi gain figures are 2.15 dB lower than dBd gain figures
B. dBi gain figures are 2.15 dB higher than dBd gain figures
C. dBi gain figures are the same as the square root of dBd gain figures multiplied by 2.15
D. dBi gain figures are the reciprocal of dBd gain figures + 2.15 dB
G9C04 GCLM Page (7 - 3)
How does antenna gain stated in dBi compare to gain stated in dBd for the same antenna?
A. dBi gain figures are 2.15 dB lower than dBd gain figures
B. dBi gain figures are 2.15 dB higher than dBd gain figures
C. dBi gain figures are the same as the square root of dBd gain figures multiplied by 2.15
D. dBi gain figures are the reciprocal of dBd gain figures + 2.15 dB
(B) G9C04 GCLM Page (7 - 3)
What is meant by the terms dBi and dBd when referring to antenna gain?
A. dBi refers to an isotropic antenna, dBd refers to a dipole antenna
B. dBi refers to an ionospheric reflecting antenna, dBd refers to a dissipative antenna
C. dBi refers to an inverted-vee antenna, dBd refers to a downward reflecting antenna
D. dBi refers to an isometric antenna, dBd refers to a discone antenna
G9C15 GCLM Page (7 - 3)
What is meant by the terms dBi and dBd when referring to antenna gain?
A. dBi refers to an isotropic antenna, dBd refers to a dipole antenna
B. dBi refers to an ionospheric reflecting antenna, dBd refers to a dissipative antenna
C. dBi refers to an inverted-vee antenna, dBd refers to a downward reflecting antenna
D. dBi refers to an isometric antenna, dBd refers to a discone antenna
(A) G9C15 GCLM Page (7 - 3)
What is meant by the terms dBi and dBd when referring to antenna gain?
A. dBi refers to an isotropic antenna, dBd refers to a dipole antenna
B. dBi refers to an ionospheric reflecting antenna, dBd refers to a dissipative antenna
C. dBi refers to an inverted-vee antenna, dBd refers to a downward reflecting antenna
D. dBi refers to an isometric antenna, dBd refers to a discone antenna
(A) G9C15 GCLM Page (7 - 3)
How does the feed point impedance of a 1/2 wave dipole change as the feed point is moved from the center toward the ends?
A. It steadily increases
B. It steadily decreases
C. It peaks at about 1/8 wavelength from the end
D. It is unaffected by the location of the feed point
G9B08 GCLM Page (7 - 3)
How does the feed point impedance of a 1/2 wave dipole change as the feed point is moved from the center toward the ends?
A. It steadily increases
B. It steadily decreases
C. It peaks at about 1/8 wavelength from the end
D. It is unaffected by the location of the feed point
(A) G9B08 GCLM Page (7 - 3)
What is the feed-point impedance of an end-fed half-wave antenna?
A. Very low
B. Approximately 50 ohms
C. Approximately 300 ohms
D. Very high
G9D02 GCLM Page (7 - 3)
What is the feed-point impedance of an end-fed half-wave antenna?
A. Very low
B. Approximately 50 ohms
C. Approximately 300 ohms
D. Very high
(D) G9D02 GCLM Page (7 - 3)
What is the approximate length for a 1/2 wave dipole antenna cut for 3.550 MHz?
A. 42 feet
B. 84 feet
C. 132 feet
D. 263 feet
G9B11 GCLM Page (7 - 3)
𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑒 − 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 4923.55
What is the approximate length for a 1/2 wave dipole antenna cut for 3.550 MHz?
A. 42 feet
B. 84 feet
C. 132 feet
D. 263 feet
(C) G9B11 GCLM Page (7 - 3)
𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑒 − 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 4923.55 = 132 𝑓𝑡.
What is the approximate length for a 1/2 wave dipole antenna cut for 14.250 MHz?
A. 8 feet
B. 16 feet
C. 24 feet
D. 33 feet
G9B10 GCLM Page (7 - 4)
𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑒 − 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 49214.250
What is the approximate length for a 1/2 wave dipole antenna cut for 14.250 MHz?
A. 8 feet
B. 16 feet
C. 24 feet
D. 33 feet
(D) G9B10 GCLM Page (7 - 4)
𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑒 − 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 49214.250 = 34.5 𝑓𝑡.
What is the common name of a dipole with a single central support?
A. Inverted V
B. Inverted L
C. Sloper
D. Lazy H
G9D12 GCLM Page (7 - 4)
What is the common name of a dipole with a single central support?
A. Inverted V
B. Inverted L
C. Sloper
D. Lazy H
(A) G9D12 GCLM Page (7 - 4)
Where should the radial wires of a ground-mounted vertical antenna system be placed?
A. As high as possible above the ground
B. Parallel to the antenna element
C. On the surface of the Earth or buried a few inches below the ground
D. At the center of the antenna
G9B06 GCLM Page (7 - 4)
Where should the radial wires of a ground-mounted vertical antenna system be placed?
A. As high as possible above the ground
B. Parallel to the antenna element
C. On the surface of the Earth or buried a few inches below the ground
D. At the center of the antenna
(C) G9B06 GCLM Page (7 - 4)
Which of the following best describes the radiation pattern of a quarter-wave, ground-plane vertical antenna?
A. Bi-directional in azimuth
B. Isotropic
C. Hemispherical
D. Omnidirectional in azimuth
G9B03 GCLM Page (7 - 4)
Which of the following best describes the radiation pattern of a quarter-wave, ground-plane vertical antenna?
A. Bi-directional in azimuth
B. Isotropic
C. Hemispherical
D. Omnidirectional in azimuth
(D) G9B03 GCLM Page (7 - 4)
Which of the following is a common way to adjust the feed-point impedance of a quarter wave ground-plane vertical antenna to
be approximately 50 ohms?
A. Slope the radials upward
B. Slope the radials downward
C. Lengthen the radials
D. Shorten the radials
G9B02 GCLM Page (7 - 5)
Which of the following is a common way to adjust the feed-point impedance of a quarter wave ground-plane vertical antenna to
be approximately 50 ohms?
A. Slope the radials upward
B. Slope the radials downward
C. Lengthen the radials
D. Shorten the radials
(B) G9B02 GCLM Page (7 - 5)
What is the approximate length for a 1/4 wave vertical antenna cut for 28.5 MHz?
A. 8 feet
B. 11 feet
C. 16 feet
D. 21 feet
G9B12 GCLM Page (7 - 5)
𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑒 − 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 24628.5
What is the approximate length for a 1/4 wave vertical antenna cut for 28.5 MHz?
A. 8 feet
B. 11 feet
C. 16 feet
D. 21 feet
(A) G9B12 GCLM Page (7 - 5)
𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑒 − 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 24628.5 = 8.6 𝑓𝑡.
What is the purpose of a capacitance hat on a mobile antenna?
A. To increase the power handling capacity of a whip antenna
B. To allow automatic band changing
C. To electrically lengthen a physically short antenna
D. To allow remote tuning
G4E01 GCLM Page (7 - 6)
What is the purpose of a capacitance hat on a mobile antenna?
A. To increase the power handling capacity of a whip antenna
B. To allow automatic band changing
C. To electrically lengthen a physically short antenna
D. To allow remote tuning
(C) G4E01 GCLM Page (7 - 6)
What is the purpose of a corona ball on an HF mobile antenna?
A. To narrow the operating bandwidth of the antenna
B. To increase the “Q” of the antenna
C. To reduce the chance of damage if the antenna should strike an object
D. To reduce RF voltage discharge from the tip of the antenna while transmitting
G4E02 GCLM Page (7 - 6)
What is the purpose of a corona ball on an HF mobile antenna?
A. To narrow the operating bandwidth of the antenna
B. To increase the “Q” of the antenna
C. To reduce the chance of damage if the antenna should strike an object
D. To reduce RF voltage discharge from the tip of the antenna while transmitting
(D) G4E02 GCLM Page (7 - 6)
What is one disadvantage of using a shortened mobile antenna as opposed to a full size antenna?
A. Short antennas are more likely to cause distortion of transmitted signals
B. Short antennas can only receive circularly polarized signals
C. Operating bandwidth may be very limited
D. Harmonic radiation may increase
G4E06 GCLM Page (7 - 6)
What is one disadvantage of using a shortened mobile antenna as opposed to a full size antenna?
A. Short antennas are more likely to cause distortion of transmitted signals
B. Short antennas can only receive circularly polarized signals
C. Operating bandwidth may be very limited
D. Harmonic radiation may increase
(C) G4E06 GCLM Page (7 - 6)
How does a “screwdriver” mobile antenna adjust its feed-point impedance?
A. By varying its body capacitance
B. By varying the base loading inductance
C. By extending and retracting the whip
D. By deploying a capacitance hat
G9D08 GCLM Page (7 - 6)
How does a “screwdriver” mobile antenna adjust its feed-point impedance?
A. By varying its body capacitance
B. By varying the base loading inductance
C. By extending and retracting the whip
D. By deploying a capacitance hat
(B) G9D08 GCLM Page (7 - 6)
How does the feed-point impedance of a 1/2 wave dipole antenna change as the antenna is lowered below 1/4 wave
above ground?
A. It steadily increases
B. It steadily decreases
C. It peaks at about 1/8 wavelength above ground
D. It is unaffected by the height above ground
G9B07 GCLM Page (7 - 6)
How does the feed-point impedance of a 1/2 wave dipole antenna change as the antenna is lowered below 1/4 wave
above ground?
A. It steadily increases
B. It steadily decreases
C. It peaks at about 1/8 wavelength above ground
D. It is unaffected by the height above ground
(B) G9B07 GCLM Page (7 - 6)
How does antenna height affect the horizontal (azimuthal) radiation pattern of a horizontal dipole HF antenna?
A. If the antenna is too high, the pattern becomes unpredictable
B. Antenna height has no effect on the pattern
C. If the antenna is less than 1/2 wavelength high, the azimuthal pattern is almost omnidirectional
D. If the antenna is less than 1/2 wavelength high, radiation off the ends of the wire is eliminated
G9B05 GCLM Page (7 - 6)
How does antenna height affect the horizontal (azimuthal) radiation pattern of a horizontal dipole HF antenna?
A. If the antenna is too high, the pattern becomes unpredictable
B. Antenna height has no effect on the pattern
C. If the antenna is less than 1/2 wavelength high, the azimuthal pattern is almost omnidirectional
D. If the antenna is less than 1/2 wavelength high, radiation off the ends of the wire is eliminated
(C) G9B05 GCLM Page (7 - 6)
Which of the following antenna types will be most effective as a Near Vertical Incidence Sky Wave (NVIS) antenna for short-skip
communications on 40 meters during the day?
A. A horizontal dipole placed between 1/10 and 1/4 wavelength above the ground
B. A vertical antenna placed between 1/4 and 1/2 wavelength above the ground
C. A left-hand circularly polarized antenna
D. A right-hand circularly polarized antenna
G9D01 GCLM Page (7 - 7)
Which of the following antenna types will be most effective as a Near Vertical Incidence Sky Wave (NVIS) antenna for short-skip
communications on 40 meters during the day?
A. A horizontal dipole placed between 1/10 and 1/4 wavelength above the ground
B. A vertical antenna placed between 1/4 and 1/2 wavelength above the ground
C. A left-hand circularly polarized antenna
D. A right-hand circularly polarized antenna
(A) G9D01 GCLM Page (7 - 7)
Which of the following is an advantage of a horizontally polarized as compared to a vertically polarized HF antenna?
A. Lower ground reflection losses
B. Lower feed-point impedance
C. Shorter radials
D. Lower radiation resistance
G9B09 GCLM Page (7 - 7)
Which of the following is an advantage of a horizontally polarized as compared to a vertically polarized HF antenna?
A. Lower ground reflection losses
B. Lower feed-point impedance
C. Shorter radials
D. Lower radiation resistance
(A) G9B09 GCLM Page (7 - 7)
7.2 Yagi Antennas
G2D04 — Which of the following describes an azimuthal projection map? G9C01 — Which of the following would increase the bandwidth of a Yagi antenna? G9C02 — What is the approximate length of the driven element of a Yagi antenna? G9C03 — How do the lengths of a three-element Yagi reflector and director compare to that of the driven element? G9C05 — How does increasing boom length and adding directors affect a Yagi antenna? G9C07 — What does “front-to-back ratio” mean in reference to a Yagi antenna? G9C08 — What is meant by the “main lobe” of a directive antenna? G9C10 — Which of the following can be adjusted to optimize forward gain, front-to-back ratio, or SWR bandwidth of a Yagi
antenna? G9C11 — Which HF antenna would be the best to use for minimizing interference?
G9C12 — Which of the following is an advantage of using a gamma match with a Yagi antenna? G9C16 — What is a beta or hairpin match?
Which HF antenna would be the best to use for minimizing interference?
A. A quarter-wave vertical antenna
B. An isotropic antenna
C. A directional antenna
D. An omnidirectional antenna
G9C11 GCLM Page (7 - 8)
Which HF antenna would be the best to use for minimizing interference?
A. A quarter-wave vertical antenna
B. An isotropic antenna
C. A directional antenna
D. An omnidirectional antenna
(C) G9C11 GCLM Page (7 - 8)
Which of the following describes an azimuthal projection map?
A. A map that shows accurate land masses
B. A map that shows true bearings and distances from a particular location
C. A map that shows the angle at which an amateur satellite crosses the equator
D. A map that shows the number of degrees longitude that an amateur satellite appears to move westward at the equator with each orbit
G2D04 GCLM Page (7 - 9)
Which of the following describes an azimuthal projection map?
A. A map that shows accurate land masses
B. A map that shows true bearings and distances from a particular location
C. A map that shows the angle at which an amateur satellite crosses the equator
D. A map that shows the number of degrees longitude that an amateur satellite appears to move westward at the equator with each orbit
(B) G2D04 GCLM Page (7 - 9)
What is meant by the “main lobe” of a directive antenna?
A. The magnitude of the maximum vertical angle of radiation
B. The point of maximum current in a radiating antenna element
C. The maximum voltage standing wave point on a radiating element
D. The direction of maximum radiated field strength from the antenna
G9C08 GCLM Page (7 - 9)
What is meant by the “main lobe” of a directive antenna?
A. The magnitude of the maximum vertical angle of radiation
B. The point of maximum current in a radiating antenna element
C. The maximum voltage standing wave point on a radiating element
D. The direction of maximum radiated field strength from the antenna
(D) G9C08 GCLM Page (7 - 9)
What is the approximate length of the driven element of a Yagi antenna?
A. 1/4 wavelength
B. 1/2 wavelength
C. 3/4 wavelength
D. 1 wavelength
G9C02 GCLM Page (7 - 10)
What is the approximate length of the driven element of a Yagi antenna?
A. 1/4 wavelength
B. 1/2 wavelength
C. 3/4 wavelength
D. 1 wavelength
(B) G9C02 GCLM Page (7 - 10)
How do the lengths of a three-element Yagi reflector and director compare to that of the driven element?
A. The reflector is longer, and the director is shorter
B. The reflector is shorter, and the director is longer
C. They are all the same length
D. Relative length depends on the frequency of operation
G9C03 GCLM Page (7 - 10)
How do the lengths of a three-element Yagi reflector and director compare to that of the driven element?
A. The reflector is longer, and the director is shorter
B. The reflector is shorter, and the director is longer
C. They are all the same length
D. Relative length depends on the frequency of operation
(A) G9C03 GCLM Page (7 - 10)
What does “front-to-back ratio” mean in reference to a Yagi antenna?
A. The number of directors versus the number of reflectors
B. The relative position of the driven element with respect to the reflectors and directors
C. The power radiated in the major radiation lobe compared to that in the opposite direction
D. The ratio of forward gain to dipole gain
G9C07 GCLM Page (7 - 10)
What does “front-to-back ratio” mean in reference to a Yagi antenna?
A. The number of directors versus the number of reflectors
B. The relative position of the driven element with respect to the reflectors and directors
C. The power radiated in the major radiation lobe compared to that in the opposite direction
D. The ratio of forward gain to dipole gain
(C) G9C07 GCLM Page (7 - 10)
How does increasing boom length and adding directors affect a Yagi antenna?
A. Gain increases
B. Beamwidth increases
C. Front-to-back ratio decreases
D. Front-to-side ratio decreases
G9C05 GCLM Page (7 - 10)
How does increasing boom length and adding directors affect a Yagi antenna?
A. Gain increases
B. Beamwidth increases
C. Front-to-back ratio decreases
D. Front-to-side ratio decreases
(A) G9C05 GCLM Page (7 - 10)
Which of the following would increase the bandwidth of a Yagi antenna?
A. Larger-diameter elements
B. Closer element spacing
C. Loading coils in series with the element
D. Tapered-diameter elements
G9C01 GCLM Page (7 - 10)
Which of the following would increase the bandwidth of a Yagi antenna?
A. Larger-diameter elements
B. Closer element spacing
C. Loading coils in series with the element
D. Tapered-diameter elements
(A) G9C01 GCLM Page (7 - 10)
Which of the following can be adjusted to optimize forward gain, front-to-back ratio, or SWR bandwidth of a Yagi antenna?
A. The physical length of the boom
B. The number of elements on the boom
C. The spacing of each element along the boom
D. All these choices are correct
G9C10 GCLM Page (7 - 11)
Which of the following can be adjusted to optimize forward gain, front-to-back ratio, or SWR bandwidth of a Yagi antenna?
A. The physical length of the boom
B. The number of elements on the boom
C. The spacing of each element along the boom
D. All these choices are correct
(D) G9C10 GCLM Page (7 - 11)
Which of the following is an advantage of using a gamma match with a Yagi antenna?
A. It does not require that the driven element be insulated from the boom
B. It does not require any inductors or capacitors
C. It is useful for matching multiband antennas
D. All these choices are correct
G9C12 GCLM Page (7 - 12)
Which of the following is an advantage of using a gamma match with a Yagi antenna?
A. It does not require that the driven element be insulated from the boom
B. It does not require any inductors or capacitors
C. It is useful for matching multiband antennas
D. All these choices are correct
(A) G9C12 GCLM Page (7 - 12)
What is a beta or hairpin match?
A. It is a shorted transmission line stub placed at the feed point of a Yagi antenna to provide impedance matching
B. It is a ¼ wavelength section of 75 ohm coax in series with the feed point of a Yagi to provide impedance matching
C. It is a series capacitor selected to cancel the inductive reactance of a folded dipole antenna
D. It is a section of 300 ohm twinlead used to match a folded dipole antenna
G9C16 GCLM Page (7 - 12)
What is a beta or hairpin match?
A. It is a shorted transmission line stub placed at the feed point of a Yagi antenna to provide impedance matching
B. It is a ¼ wavelength section of 75 ohm coax in series with the feed point of a Yagi to provide impedance matching
C. It is a series capacitor selected to cancel the inductive reactance of a folded dipole antenna
D. It is a section of 300 ohm twinlead used to match a folded dipole antenna
(A) G9C16 GCLM Page (7 - 12)
7.3 Loop Antennas
G9C06 — What configuration of the loops of a two-element quad antenna must be used for the antenna to operate as a beam antenna, assuming one of the elements is used as a reflector?
G9C13 — Approximately how long is each side of the driven element of a quad antenna? G9C14 — How does the forward gain of a two-element quad antenna compare to the forward gain of a three-element Yagi
antenna? G9D03 — In which direction is the maximum radiation from a portable VHF/UHF “halo” antenna? G9D10 — In which direction or directions does an electrically small loop (less than 1⁄3 wavelength in circumference) have nulls in
its radiation pattern? G9D13 — What is the combined vertical and horizontal polarization pattern of a multi-wavelength, horizontal loop antenna?
What is the combined vertical and horizontal polarization pattern of a multi-wavelength, horizontal loop antenna?
A. A figure-eight, similar to a dipole
B. Four major loops with deep nulls
C. Virtually omnidirectional with a lower peak vertical radiation angle than a dipole
D. Radiation maximum is straight up
G9D13 GCLM Page (7 - 13)
What is the combined vertical and horizontal polarization pattern of a multi-wavelength, horizontal loop antenna?
A. A figure-eight, similar to a dipole
B. Four major loops with deep nulls
C. Virtually omnidirectional with a lower peak vertical radiation angle than a dipole
D. Radiation maximum is straight up
(C) G9D13 GCLM Page (7 - 13)
Approximately how long is each side of the driven element of a quad antenna?
A. 1/4 wavelength
B. 1/2 wavelength
C. 3/4 wavelength
D. 1 wavelength
G9C13 GCLM Page (7 - 13)
Approximately how long is each side of the driven element of a quad antenna?
A. 1/4 wavelength
B. 1/2 wavelength
C. 3/4 wavelength
D. 1 wavelength
(A) G9C13 GCLM Page (7 - 13)
What configuration of the loops of a two-element quad antenna must be used for the antenna to operate as a beam antenna,
assuming one of the elements is used as a reflector?
A. The driven element must be fed with a balun transformerB. There must be an open circuit in the driven element at the point opposite the feed
pointC. The reflector element must be approximately 5 percent shorter than the driven
elementD. The reflector element must be approximately 5 percent longer than the driven
elementG9C06 GCLM Page (7 - 13)
What configuration of the loops of a two-element quad antenna must be used for the antenna to operate as a beam antenna,
assuming one of the elements is used as a reflector?
A. The driven element must be fed with a balun transformerB. There must be an open circuit in the driven element at the point opposite the feed
pointC. The reflector element must be approximately 5 percent shorter than the driven
elementD. The reflector element must be approximately 5 percent longer than the driven
element(D) G9C06 GCLM Page (7 - 13)
How does the forward gain of a two-element quad antenna compare to the forward gain of a three-element Yagi antenna?
A. About the same
B. About 2/3 as much
C. About 1.5 times as much
D. About twice as much
G9C14 GCLM Page (7 - 15)
How does the forward gain of a two-element quad antenna compare to the forward gain of a three-element Yagi antenna?
A. About the same
B. About 2/3 as much
C. About 1.5 times as much
D. About twice as much
(A) G9C14 GCLM Page (7 - 15)
In which direction or directions does an electrically small loop (less than 1/3 wavelength in circumference) have nulls in its
radiation pattern?
A. In the plane of the loop
B. Broadside to the loop
C. Broadside and in the plane of the loop
D. Electrically small loops are omnidirectional
G9D10 GCLM Page (7 - 15)
In which direction or directions does an electrically small loop (less than 1/3 wavelength in circumference) have nulls in its
radiation pattern?
A. In the plane of the loop
B. Broadside to the loop
C. Broadside and in the plane of the loop
D. Electrically small loops are omnidirectional
(B) G9D10 GCLM Page (7 - 15)
In which direction is the maximum radiation from a portable VHF/UHF “halo” antenna?
A. Broadside to the plane of the halo
B. Opposite the feed point
C. Omnidirectional in the plane of the halo
D. Toward the halo’s supporting mast
G9D03 GCLM Page (7 - 15)
In which direction is the maximum radiation from a portable VHF/UHF “halo” antenna?
A. Broadside to the plane of the halo
B. Opposite the feed point
C. Omnidirectional in the plane of the halo
D. Toward the halo’s supporting mast
(C) G9D03 GCLM Page (7 - 15)
7.4 Specialized Antennas
G9B01 — What is one disadvantage of a directly fed random-wire HF antenna? G9C09 — How does the gain of two three-element, horizontally polarized Yagi antennas spaced vertically 1⁄2 wavelength apart
typically compare to the gain of a single three-element Yagi? G9D04 — What is the primary purpose of antenna traps? G9D05 — What is an advantage of vertical stacking of horizontally polarized Yagi antennas? G9D06 — Which of the following is an advantage of a log periodic antenna? G9D07 — Which of the following describes a log periodic antenna? G9D09 — What is the primary use of a Beverage antenna? G9D11 — Which of the following is a disadvantage of multiband antennas?
What is one disadvantage of a directly fed random-wire HF antenna?
A. It must be longer than 1 wavelength
B. You may experience RF burns when touching metal objects in your station
C. It produces only vertically polarized radiation
D. It is more effective on the lower HF bands than on the higher bands
G9B01 GCLM Page (7 - 16)
What is one disadvantage of a directly fed random-wire HF antenna?
A. It must be longer than 1 wavelength
B. You may experience RF burns when touching metal objects in your station
C. It produces only vertically polarized radiation
D. It is more effective on the lower HF bands than on the higher bands
(B) G9B01 GCLM Page (7 - 16)
What is an advantage of vertical stacking of horizontally polarized Yagi antennas?
A. It allows quick selection of vertical or horizontal polarization
B. It allows simultaneous vertical and horizontal polarization
C. It narrows the main lobe in azimuth
D. It narrows the main lobe in elevation
G9D05 GCLM Page (7 - 17)
What is an advantage of vertical stacking of horizontally polarized Yagi antennas?
A. It allows quick selection of vertical or horizontal polarization
B. It allows simultaneous vertical and horizontal polarization
C. It narrows the main lobe in azimuth
D. It narrows the main lobe in elevation
(D) G9D05 GCLM Page (7 - 17)
How does the gain of two three-element, horizontally polarized Yagi antennas spaced vertically 1/2 wavelength apart typically
compare to the gain of a single three-element Yagi?
A. Approximately 1.5 dB higher
B. Approximately 3 dB higher
C. Approximately 6 dB higher
D. Approximately 9 dB higher
G9C09 GCLM Page (7 - 17)
How does the gain of two three-element, horizontally polarized Yagi antennas spaced vertically 1/2 wavelength apart typically
compare to the gain of a single three-element Yagi?
A. Approximately 1.5 dB higher
B. Approximately 3 dB higher
C. Approximately 6 dB higher
D. Approximately 9 dB higher
(B) G9C09 GCLM Page (7 - 17)
Which of the following is an advantage of a log periodic antenna?
A. Wide bandwidth
B. Higher gain per element than a Yagi antenna
C. Harmonic suppression
D. Polarization diversity
G9D06 GCLM Page (7 - 17)
Which of the following is an advantage of a log periodic antenna?
A. Wide bandwidth
B. Higher gain per element than a Yagi antenna
C. Harmonic suppression
D. Polarization diversity
(A) G9D06 GCLM Page (7 - 17)
Which of the following describes a log periodic antenna?
A. Element length and spacing vary logarithmically along the boom
B. Impedance varies periodically as a function of frequency
C. Gain varies logarithmically as a function of frequency
D. SWR varies periodically as a function of boom length
G9D07 GCLM Page (7 - 17)
Which of the following describes a log periodic antenna?
A. Element length and spacing vary logarithmically along the boom
B. Impedance varies periodically as a function of frequency
C. Gain varies logarithmically as a function of frequency
D. SWR varies periodically as a function of boom length
(A) G9D07 GCLM Page (7 - 17)
What is the primary use of a Beverage antenna?
A. Directional receiving for low HF bands
B. Directional transmitting for low HF bands
C. Portable direction finding at higher HF frequencies
D. Portable direction finding at lower HF frequencies
G9D09 GCLM Page (7 - 17)
What is the primary use of a Beverage antenna?
A. Directional receiving for low HF bands
B. Directional transmitting for low HF bands
C. Portable direction finding at higher HF frequencies
D. Portable direction finding at lower HF frequencies
(A) G9D09 GCLM Page (7 - 17)
What is the primary purpose of antenna traps?
A. To permit multiband operation
B. To notch spurious frequencies
C. To provide balanced feed-point impedance
D. To prevent out-of-band operation
G9D04 GCLM Page (7 - 19)
What is the primary purpose of antenna traps?
A. To permit multiband operation
B. To notch spurious frequencies
C. To provide balanced feed-point impedance
D. To prevent out-of-band operation
(A) G9D04 GCLM Page (7 - 19)
Which of the following is a disadvantage of multiband antennas?
A. They present low impedance on all design frequencies
B. They must be used with an antenna tuner
C. They must be fed with open wire line
D. They have poor harmonic rejection
G9D11 GCLM Page (7 - 19)
Which of the following is a disadvantage of multiband antennas?
A. They present low impedance on all design frequencies
B. They must be used with an antenna tuner
C. They must be fed with open wire line
D. They have poor harmonic rejection
(D) G9D11 GCLM Page (7 - 19)
7.5 Feed Lines
G4A06 — What type of device is often used to match transmitter output impedance to an impedance not equal to 50 ohms? G9A01 — Which of the following factors determine the characteristic impedance of a parallel conductor antenna feed line?G9A02 — What are the typical characteristic impedances of coaxial cables used for antenna feed lines at amateur stations? G9A03 — What is the typical characteristic impedance of “window line” parallel transmission line? G9A04 — What might cause reflected power at the point where a feed line connects to an antenna? G9A05 — How does the attenuation of coaxial cable change as the frequency of the signal it is carrying increases? G9A06 — In what units is RF feed line loss usually expressed? G9A07 — What must be done to prevent standing waves on an antenna feed line? G9A08 — If the SWR on an antenna feed line is 5 to 1, and a matching network at the transmitter end of the feed line is adjusted to 1 to 1 SWR,
what is the resulting SWR on the feed line? G9A09 — What standing wave ratio will result when connecting a 50 ohm feed line to a non-reactive load having 200 ohm impedance?G9A10 — What standing wave ratio will result when connecting a 50 ohm feed line to a non-reactive load having 10 ohm impedance? G9A11 — What standing wave ratio will result when connecting a 50 ohm feed line to a non-reactive load having 50 ohm impedance? G9A12 — What is the interaction between high standing wave ratio (SWR) and transmission line loss? G9A13 — What is the effect of transmission line loss on SWR measured at the input to the line?
Which of the following factors determine the characteristic impedance of a parallel conductor antenna feed line?
A. The distance between the centers of the conductors and the radius of the conductors
B. The distance between the centers of the conductors and the length of the line
C. The radius of the conductors and the frequency of the signal
D. The frequency of the signal and the length of the line
G9A01 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
Which of the following factors determine the characteristic impedance of a parallel conductor antenna feed line?
A. The distance between the centers of the conductors and the radius of the conductors
B. The distance between the centers of the conductors and the length of the line
C. The radius of the conductors and the frequency of the signal
D. The frequency of the signal and the length of the line
(A) G9A01 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
What is the typical characteristic impedance of “window line” parallel transmission line?
A. 50 ohms
B. 75 ohms
C. 100 ohms
D. 450 ohms
G9A03 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
What is the typical characteristic impedance of “window line” parallel transmission line?
A. 50 ohms
B. 75 ohms
C. 100 ohms
D. 450 ohms
(D) G9A03 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
What are the typical characteristic impedances of coaxial cables used for antenna feed lines at amateur stations?
A. 25 and 30 ohms
B. 50 and 75 ohms
C. 80 and 100 ohms
D. 500 and 750 ohms
G9A02 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
What are the typical characteristic impedances of coaxial cables used for antenna feed lines at amateur stations?
A. 25 and 30 ohms
B. 50 and 75 ohms
C. 80 and 100 ohms
D. 500 and 750 ohms
(B) G9A02 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
What might cause reflected power at the point where a feed line connects to an antenna?
A. Operating an antenna at its resonant frequency
B. Using more transmitter power than the antenna can handle
C. A difference between feed-line impedance and antenna feed-point impedance
D. Feeding the antenna with unbalanced feed line
G9A04 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
What might cause reflected power at the point where a feed line connects to an antenna?
A. Operating an antenna at its resonant frequency
B. Using more transmitter power than the antenna can handle
C. A difference between feed-line impedance and antenna feed-point impedance
D. Feeding the antenna with unbalanced feed line
(C) G9A04 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
What standing wave ratio will result when connecting a 50 ohm feed line to a non-reactive load having 200 ohm impedance?
A. 4:1
B. 1:4
C. 2:1
D. 1:2
G9A09 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
𝑆𝑊𝑅 = 20050
What standing wave ratio will result when connecting a 50 ohm feed line to a non-reactive load having 200 ohm impedance?
A. 4:1
B. 1:4
C. 2:1
D. 1:2
(A) G9A09 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
𝑆𝑊𝑅 = 20050= 4: 1
What standing wave ratio will result when connecting a 50 ohm feed line to a non-reactive load having 10 ohm impedance?
A. 2:1
B. 50:1
C. 1:5
D. 5:1
G9A10 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
𝑆𝑊𝑅 = 5010
What standing wave ratio will result when connecting a 50 ohm feed line to a non-reactive load having 10 ohm impedance?
A. 2:1
B. 50:1
C. 1:5
D. 5:1
(D) G9A10 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
𝑆𝑊𝑅 = 5010 = 5: 1
What standing wave ratio will result when connecting a 50 ohm feed line to a non-reactive load having 50 ohm impedance?
A. 2:1
B. 1:1
C. 50:50
D. 0:0
G9A11 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
𝑆𝑊𝑅 = 5050
What standing wave ratio will result when connecting a 50 ohm feed line to a non-reactive load having 50 ohm impedance?
A. 2:1
B. 1:1
C. 50:50
D. 0:0
(B) G9A11 GCLM Page (7 - 21)
𝑆𝑊𝑅 = 5050 = 1: 1
What must be done to prevent standing waves on an antenna feed line?
A. The antenna feed point must be at DC ground potential
B. The feed line must be cut to a length equal to an odd number of electrical quarter wavelengths
C. The feed line must be cut to a length equal to an even number of physical half wavelengths
D. The antenna feed point impedance must be matched to the characteristic impedance of the feed line
G9A07 GCLM Page (7 - 22)
What must be done to prevent standing waves on an antenna feed line?
A. The antenna feed point must be at DC ground potential
B. The feed line must be cut to a length equal to an odd number of electrical quarter wavelengths
C. The feed line must be cut to a length equal to an even number of physical half wavelengths
D. The antenna feed point impedance must be matched to the characteristic impedance of the feed line
(D) G9A07 GCLM Page (7 - 22)
What type of device is often used to match transmitter output impedance to an impedance not equal to 50 ohms?
A. Balanced modulator
B. SWR bridge
C. Antenna coupler or antenna tuner
D. Q multiplier
G4A06 GCLM Page (7 - 22)
What type of device is often used to match transmitter output impedance to an impedance not equal to 50 ohms?
A. Balanced modulator
B. SWR bridge
C. Antenna coupler or antenna tuner
D. Q multiplier
(C) G4A06 GCLM Page (7 - 22)
If the SWR on an antenna feed line is 5 to 1, and a matching network at the transmitter end of the feed line is adjusted to 1
to 1 SWR, what is the resulting SWR on the feed line?
A. 1 to 1
B. 5 to 1
C. Between 1 to 1 and 5 to 1 depending on the characteristic impedance of the line
D. Between 1 to 1 and 5 to 1 depending on the reflected power at the transmitter
G9A08 GCLM Page (7 - 22)
If the SWR on an antenna feed line is 5 to 1, and a matching network at the transmitter end of the feed line is adjusted to 1
to 1 SWR, what is the resulting SWR on the feed line?
A. 1 to 1
B. 5 to 1
C. Between 1 to 1 and 5 to 1 depending on the characteristic impedance of the line
D. Between 1 to 1 and 5 to 1 depending on the reflected power at the transmitter
(B) G9A08 GCLM Page (7 - 22)
In what units is RF feed line loss usually expressed?
A. Ohms per 1000 feet
B. Decibels per 1000 feet
C. Ohms per 100 feet
D. Decibels per 100 feet
G9A06 GCLM Page (7 - 23)
In what units is RF feed line loss usually expressed?
A. Ohms per 1000 feet
B. Decibels per 1000 feet
C. Ohms per 100 feet
D. Decibels per 100 feet
(D) G9A06 GCLM Page (7 - 23)
How does the attenuation of coaxial cable change as the frequency of the signal it is carrying increases?
A. Attenuation is independent of frequency
B. Attenuation increases
C. Attenuation decreases
D. Attenuation reaches a maximum at approximately 18 MHz
G9A05 GCLM Page (7 - 23)
How does the attenuation of coaxial cable change as the frequency of the signal it is carrying increases?
A. Attenuation is independent of frequency
B. Attenuation increases
C. Attenuation decreases
D. Attenuation reaches a maximum at approximately 18 MHz
(B) G9A05 GCLM Page (7 - 23)
What is the interaction between high standing wave ratio (SWR) and transmission line loss?
A. There is no interaction between transmission line loss and SWR
B. If a transmission line is lossy, high SWR will increase the loss
C. High SWR makes it difficult to measure transmission line loss
D. High SWR reduces the relative effect of transmission line loss
G9A12 GCLM Page (7 - 23)
What is the interaction between high standing wave ratio (SWR) and transmission line loss?
A. There is no interaction between transmission line loss and SWR
B. If a transmission line is lossy, high SWR will increase the loss
C. High SWR makes it difficult to measure transmission line loss
D. High SWR reduces the relative effect of transmission line loss
(B) G9A12 GCLM Page (7 - 23)
What is the effect of transmission line loss on SWR measured at the input to the line?
A. The higher the transmission line loss, the more the SWR will read artificially low
B. The higher the transmission line loss, the more the SWR will read artificially high
C. The higher the transmission line loss, the more accurate the SWR measurement will be
D. Transmission line loss does not affect the SWR measurement
G9A13 GCLM Page (7 - 23)
What is the effect of transmission line loss on SWR measured at the input to the line?
A. The higher the transmission line loss, the more the SWR will read artificially low
B. The higher the transmission line loss, the more the SWR will read artificially high
C. The higher the transmission line loss, the more accurate the SWR measurement will be
D. Transmission line loss does not affect the SWR measurement
(A) G9A13 GCLM Page (7 - 23)
Course Overview
IntroductionProcedures and Practices
Rules and RegulationsComponents and Circuits
Radio Signals and EquipmentDigital Modes
AntennasPropagation
Electrical and RF Safety
8.1 The Ionosphere
G2D06 — How is a directional antenna pointed when making a “long-path” contact with another station? G2D11 — Which of the following is typical of the lower HF frequencies during the summer? G3B01 — What is a characteristic of skywave signals arriving at your location by both short-path and long-path propagation? G3B09 — What is the approximate maximum distance along the Earth’s surface that is normally covered in one hop using the F2
region? G3B10 — What is the approximate maximum distance along the Earth’s surface that is normally covered in one hop using the E
region? G3C01 — Which ionospheric layer is closest to the surface of Earth? G3C02 — Where on Earth do ionospheric layers reach their maximum height? G3C03 — Why is the F2 region mainly responsible for the longest distance radio wave propagation? G3C04 —What does the term “critical angle” mean, as used in radio wave propagation? G3C05 — Why is long-distance communication on the 40-meter, 60-meter, 80-meter, and 160-meter bands more difficult during
the day? G3C11 — Which ionospheric layer is the most absorbent of long skip signals during daylight hours on frequencies below 10 MHz?
Which ionospheric layer is closest to the surface of Earth?
A. The D layer
B. The E layer
C. The F1 layer
D. The F2 layer
G3C01 GCLM Page (8 - 2)
Which ionospheric layer is closest to the surface of Earth?
A. The D layer
B. The E layer
C. The F1 layer
D. The F2 layer
(A) G3C01 GCLM Page (8 - 2)
Where on Earth do ionospheric layers reach their maximum height?
A. Where the sun is overhead
B. Where the sun is on the opposite side of Earth
C. Where the sun is rising
D. Where the sun has just set
G3C02 GCLM Page (8 - 2)
Where on Earth do ionospheric layers reach their maximum height?
A. Where the sun is overhead
B. Where the sun is on the opposite side of Earth
C. Where the sun is rising
D. Where the sun has just set
(A) G3C02 GCLM Page (8 - 2)
What is the approximate maximum distance along the Earth’s surface that is normally covered in one hop using the F2 region?
A. 180 miles
B. 1,200 miles
C. 2,500 miles
D. 12,000 miles
G3B09 GCLM Page (8 - 2)
What is the approximate maximum distance along the Earth’s surface that is normally covered in one hop using the F2 region?
A. 180 miles
B. 1,200 miles
C. 2,500 miles
D. 12,000 miles
(C) G3B09 GCLM Page (8 - 2)
What is the approximate maximum distance along the Earth’s surface that is normally covered in one hop using the E region?
A. 180 miles
B. 1,200 miles
C. 2,500 miles
D. 12,000 miles
G3B10 GCLM Page (8 - 2)
What is the approximate maximum distance along the Earth’s surface that is normally covered in one hop using the E region?
A. 180 miles
B. 1,200 miles
C. 2,500 miles
D. 12,000 miles
(B) G3B10 GCLM Page (8 - 2)
Why is the F2 region mainly responsible for the longest distance radio wave propagation?
A. Because it is the densest ionospheric layer
B. Because of the Doppler effect
C. Because it is the highest ionospheric region
D. Because of meteor trails at that level
G3C03 GCLM Page (8 - 2)
Why is the F2 region mainly responsible for the longest distance radio wave propagation?
A. Because it is the densest ionospheric layer
B. Because of the Doppler effect
C. Because it is the highest ionospheric region
D. Because of meteor trails at that level
(C) G3C03 GCLM Page (8 - 2)
What does the term “critical angle” mean, as used in radio wave propagation?
A. The long path azimuth of a distant station
B. The short path azimuth of a distant station
C. The lowest takeoff angle that will return a radio wave to Earth under specific ionospheric conditions
D. The highest takeoff angle that will return a radio wave to Earth under specific ionospheric conditions
G3C04 GCLM Page (8 - 2)
What does the term “critical angle” mean, as used in radio wave propagation?
A. The long path azimuth of a distant station
B. The short path azimuth of a distant station
C. The lowest takeoff angle that will return a radio wave to Earth under specific ionospheric conditions
D. The highest takeoff angle that will return a radio wave to Earth under specific ionospheric conditions
(D) G3C04 GCLM Page (8 - 2)
Why is long-distance communication on the 40-meter, 60-meter, 80-meter, and 160-meter bands more difficult during the day?
A. The F layer absorbs signals at these frequencies during daylight hours
B. The F layer is unstable during daylight hours
C. The D layer absorbs signals at these frequencies during daylight hours
D. The E layer is unstable during daylight hours
G3C05 GCLM Page (8 - 5)
Why is long-distance communication on the 40-meter, 60-meter, 80-meter, and 160-meter bands more difficult during the day?
A. The F layer absorbs signals at these frequencies during daylight hours
B. The F layer is unstable during daylight hours
C. The D layer absorbs signals at these frequencies during daylight hours
D. The E layer is unstable during daylight hours
(C) G3C05 GCLM Page (8 - 5)
Which ionospheric layer is the most absorbent of long skip signals during daylight hours on frequencies below 10 MHz?
A. The F2 layer
B. The F1 layer
C. The E layer
D. The D layer
G3C11 GCLM Page (8 - 5)
Which ionospheric layer is the most absorbent of long skip signals during daylight hours on frequencies below 10 MHz?
A. The F2 layer
B. The F1 layer
C. The E layer
D. The D layer
(D) G3C11 GCLM Page (8 - 5)
Which of the following is typical of the lower HF frequencies during the summer?
A. Poor propagation at any time of day
B. World-wide propagation during the daylight hours
C. Heavy distortion on signals due to photon absorption
D. High levels of atmospheric noise or “static”
G2D11 GCLM Page (8 - 5)
Which of the following is typical of the lower HF frequencies during the summer?
A. Poor propagation at any time of day
B. World-wide propagation during the daylight hours
C. Heavy distortion on signals due to photon absorption
D. High levels of atmospheric noise or “static”
(D) G2D11 GCLM Page (8 - 5)
How is a directional antenna pointed when making a “long-path” contact with another station?
A. Toward the rising sun
B. Along the grayline
C. 180 degrees from the station’s short-path heading
D. Toward the north
G2D06 GCLM Page (8 - 5)
How is a directional antenna pointed when making a “long-path” contact with another station?
A. Toward the rising sun
B. Along the grayline
C. 180 degrees from the station’s short-path heading
D. Toward the north
(C) G2D06 GCLM Page (8 - 5)
What is a characteristic of skywave signals arriving at your location by both short-path and long-path propagation?
A. Periodic fading approximately every 10 seconds
B. Signal strength increased by 3 dB
C. The signal might be cancelled causing severe attenuation
D. A slightly delayed echo might be heard
G3B01 GCLM Page (8 - 6)
What is a characteristic of skywave signals arriving at your location by both short-path and long-path propagation?
A. Periodic fading approximately every 10 seconds
B. Signal strength increased by 3 dB
C. The signal might be cancelled causing severe attenuation
D. A slightly delayed echo might be heard
(D) G3B01 GCLM Page (8 - 6)
8.2 The Sun
G3A01 — What is the significance of the sunspot number with regard to HF propagation? G3A04 — Which of the following are least reliable for long-distance communications during
periods of low solar activity? G3A05 — What is the solar flux index? G3A07 — At what point in the solar cycle does the 20-meter band usually support worldwide
propagation during daylight hours? G3A10 — What causes HF propagation conditions to vary periodically in a roughly 28-day cycle? G3A12 — What does the K-index indicate? G3A13 — What does the A-index indicate?
What is the significance of the sunspot number with regard to HF propagation?
A. Higher sunspot numbers generally indicate a greater probability of good propagation at higher frequencies
B. Lower sunspot numbers generally indicate greater probability of sporadic E propagation
C. A zero sunspot number indicates that radio propagation is not possible on any band
D. A zero sunspot number indicates undisturbed conditions
G3A01 GCLM Page (8 - 7)
What is the significance of the sunspot number with regard to HF propagation?
A. Higher sunspot numbers generally indicate a greater probability of good propagation at higher frequencies
B. Lower sunspot numbers generally indicate greater probability of sporadic E propagation
C. A zero sunspot number indicates that radio propagation is not possible on any band
D. A zero sunspot number indicates undisturbed conditions
(A) G3A01 GCLM Page (8 - 7)
Which of the following are least reliable for long-distance communications during periods of low solar activity?
A. 80 meters and 160 meters
B. 60 meters and 40 meters
C. 30 meters and 20 meters
D. 15 meters, 12 meters, and 10 meters
G3A04 GCLM Page (8 - 7)
Which of the following are least reliable for long-distance communications during periods of low solar activity?
A. 80 meters and 160 meters
B. 60 meters and 40 meters
C. 30 meters and 20 meters
D. 15 meters, 12 meters, and 10 meters
(D) G3A04 GCLM Page (8 - 7)
At what point in the solar cycle does the 20-meter band usually support worldwide propagation during daylight hours?
A. At the summer solstice
B. Only at the maximum point of the solar cycle
C. Only at the minimum point of the solar cycle
D. At any point in the solar cycle
G3A07 GCLM Page (8 - 8)
At what point in the solar cycle does the 20-meter band usually support worldwide propagation during daylight hours?
A. At the summer solstice
B. Only at the maximum point of the solar cycle
C. Only at the minimum point of the solar cycle
D. At any point in the solar cycle
(D) G3A07 GCLM Page (8 - 8)
What causes HF propagation conditions to vary periodically in a roughly 28-day cycle?
A. Long term oscillations in the upper atmosphere
B. Cyclic variation in Earth’s radiation belts
C. The sun’s rotation on its axis
D. The position of the moon in its orbit
G3A10 GCLM Page (8 - 8)
What causes HF propagation conditions to vary periodically in a roughly 28-day cycle?
A. Long term oscillations in the upper atmosphere
B. Cyclic variation in Earth’s radiation belts
C. The sun’s rotation on its axis
D. The position of the moon in its orbit
(C) G3A10 GCLM Page (8 - 8)
What is the solar flux index?
A. A measure of the highest frequency that is useful for ionospheric propagation between two points on Earth
B. A count of sunspots that is adjusted for solar emissions
C. Another name for the American sunspot number
D. A measure of solar radiation at 10.7 centimeters wavelength
G3A05 GCLM Page (8 - 9)
What is the solar flux index?
A. A measure of the highest frequency that is useful for ionospheric propagation between two points on Earth
B. A count of sunspots that is adjusted for solar emissions
C. Another name for the American sunspot number
D. A measure of solar radiation at 10.7 centimeters wavelength
(D) G3A05 GCLM Page (8 - 9)
What does the K-index indicate?
A. The relative position of sunspots on the surface of the sun
B. The short-term stability of Earth’s magnetic field
C. The stability of the sun’s magnetic field
D. The solar radio flux at Boulder, Colorado
G3A12 GCLM Page (8 - 9)
What does the K-index indicate?
A. The relative position of sunspots on the surface of the sun
B. The short-term stability of Earth’s magnetic field
C. The stability of the sun’s magnetic field
D. The solar radio flux at Boulder, Colorado
(B) G3A12 GCLM Page (8 - 9)
What does the A-index indicate?
A. The relative position of sunspots on the surface of the sun
B. The amount of polarization of the sun’s electric field
C. The long-term stability of Earth’s geomagnetic field
D. The solar radio flux at Boulder, Colorado
G3A13 GCLM Page (8 - 9)
What does the A-index indicate?
A. The relative position of sunspots on the surface of the sun
B. The amount of polarization of the sun’s electric field
C. The long-term stability of Earth’s geomagnetic field
D. The solar radio flux at Boulder, Colorado
(C) G3A13 GCLM Page (8 - 9)
ASSESSING PROPAGATION G3A02 — What effect does a Sudden Ionospheric Disturbance have on the daytime ionospheric propagation of HF radio waves? G3A03 — Approximately how long does it take the increased ultraviolet and X-ray radiation from solar flares to affect radio
propagation on Earth? G3A06 — What is a geomagnetic storm? G3A08 — Which of the following effects can a geomagnetic storm have on radio propagation? G3A09 — What benefit can high geomagnetic activity have on radio communications? G3A11 — How long does it take charged particles from coronal mass ejections to affect radio propagation on Earth? G3A14 — How are radio communications usually affected by the charged particles that reach Earth from solar coronal holes? G3B02 — What factors affect the MUF?G3B03 — Which of the following applies when selecting a frequency for lowest attenuation when transmitting on HF? G3B04 — What is a reliable way to determine if the MUF is high enough to support skip propagation between your station and a
distant location on frequencies between 14 and 30 MHz? G3B05 — What usually happens to radio waves with frequencies below the MUF and above the LUF when they are sent into the
ionosphere? G3B06 — What usually happens to radio waves with frequencies below the LUF? G3B07 — What does LUF stand for? G3B08 — What does MUF stand for? G3B11 — What happens to HF propagation when the LUF exceeds the MUF?
What does LUF stand for?
A. The Lowest Usable Frequency for communications between two points
B. The Longest Universal Function for communications between two points
C. The Lowest Usable Frequency during a 24-hour period
D. The Longest Universal Function during a 24-hour period
G3B07 GCLM Page (8 - 9)
What does LUF stand for?
A. The Lowest Usable Frequency for communications between two points
B. The Longest Universal Function for communications between two points
C. The Lowest Usable Frequency during a 24-hour period
D. The Longest Universal Function during a 24-hour period
(A) G3B07 GCLM Page (8 - 9)
What does MUF stand for?
A. The Minimum Usable Frequency for communications between two points
B. The Maximum Usable Frequency for communications between two points
C. The Minimum Usable Frequency during a 24-hour period
D. The Maximum Usable Frequency during a 24-hour period
G3B08 GCLM Page (8 - 9)
What does MUF stand for?
A. The Minimum Usable Frequency for communications between two points
B. The Maximum Usable Frequency for communications between two points
C. The Minimum Usable Frequency during a 24-hour period
D. The Maximum Usable Frequency during a 24-hour period
(B) G3B08 GCLM Page (8 - 9)
What factors affect the MUF?
A. Path distance and location
B. Time of day and season
C. Solar radiation and ionospheric disturbances
D. All these choices are correct
G3B02 GCLM Page (8 - 9)
What factors affect the MUF?
A. Path distance and location
B. Time of day and season
C. Solar radiation and ionospheric disturbances
D. All these choices are correct
(D) G3B02 GCLM Page (8 - 9)
What usually happens to radio waves with frequencies below the LUF?
A. They are bent back to Earth
B. They pass through the ionosphere
C. They are completely absorbed by the ionosphere
D. They are bent and trapped in the ionosphere to circle Earth
G3B06 GCLM Page (8 - 10)
What usually happens to radio waves with frequencies below the LUF?
A. They are bent back to Earth
B. They pass through the ionosphere
C. They are completely absorbed by the ionosphere
D. They are bent and trapped in the ionosphere to circle Earth
(C) G3B06 GCLM Page (8 - 10)
What usually happens to radio waves with frequencies below the MUF and above the LUF when they are sent into the ionosphere?
A. They are bent back to Earth
B. They pass through the ionosphere
C. They are amplified by interaction with the ionosphere
D. They are bent and trapped in the ionosphere to circle Earth
G3B05 GCLM Page (8 - 10)
What usually happens to radio waves with frequencies below the MUF and above the LUF when they are sent into the ionosphere?
A. They are bent back to Earth
B. They pass through the ionosphere
C. They are amplified by interaction with the ionosphere
D. They are bent and trapped in the ionosphere to circle Earth
(A) G3B05 GCLM Page (8 - 10)
What happens to HF propagation when the LUF exceeds the MUF?
A. No HF radio frequency will support ordinary skywave communications over the path
B. HF communications over the path are enhanced
C. Double hop propagation along the path is more common
D. Propagation over the path on all HF frequencies is enhanced
G3B11 GCLM Page (8 - 10)
What happens to HF propagation when the LUF exceeds the MUF?
A. No HF radio frequency will support ordinary skywave communications over the path
B. HF communications over the path are enhanced
C. Double hop propagation along the path is more common
D. Propagation over the path on all HF frequencies is enhanced
(A) G3B11 GCLM Page (8 - 10)
Which of the following applies when selecting a frequency for lowest attenuation when transmitting on HF?
A. Select a frequency just below the MUF
B. Select a frequency just above the LUF
C. Select a frequency just below the critical frequency
D. Select a frequency just above the critical frequency
G3B03 GCLM Page (8 - 10)
Which of the following applies when selecting a frequency for lowest attenuation when transmitting on HF?
A. Select a frequency just below the MUF
B. Select a frequency just above the LUF
C. Select a frequency just below the critical frequency
D. Select a frequency just above the critical frequency
(A) G3B03 GCLM Page (8 - 10)
What is a reliable way to determine if the MUF is high enough to support skip propagation between your station and a distant
location on frequencies between 14 and 30 MHz?A. Listen for signals from an international beacon in the
frequency range you plan to use
B. Send a series of dots on the band and listen for echoes from your signal
C. Check the strength of TV signals from western Europe
D. Check the strength of signals
in the MF AM broadcast band
G3B04 GCLM Page (8 - 10)
What is a reliable way to determine if the MUF is high enough to support skip propagation between your station and a distant
location on frequencies between 14 and 30 MHz?A. Listen for signals from an international beacon in the
frequency range you plan to use
B. Send a series of dots on the band and listen for echoes from your signal
C. Check the strength of TV signals from western Europe
D. Check the strength of signals
in the MF AM broadcast band
(A) G3B04 GCLM Page (8 - 10)
Each beacon transmits once on each band once every three minutes, 24 hours a day.A transmission consists of the callsign of the beacon sent at 22 words per minute followed by four one-second dashes.The callsign and the first dash are sent at 100 watts. The remaining dashes are sent at 10 watts, 1 watt and 100 milliwatts.At the end of each 10 second transmission, the beacon steps to the next higher band and the next beacon in the sequence begins transmitting.http://69.27.184.58:8073/
KFS KiwiSDR Half Moon Bay
https://www.ncdxf.org/beacon/
Approximately how long does it take the increased ultraviolet and X-ray radiation from solar flares to affect radio propagation
on Earth?
A. 28 days
B. 1 to 2 hours
C. 8 minutes
D. 20 to 40 hours
G3A03 GCLM Page (8 - 10)
Approximately how long does it take the increased ultraviolet and X-ray radiation from solar flares to affect radio propagation
on Earth?
A. 28 days
B. 1 to 2 hours
C. 8 minutes
D. 20 to 40 hours
(C) G3A03 GCLM Page (8 - 10)
What effect does a Sudden Ionospheric Disturbance have on the daytime ionospheric propagation of HF radio waves?
A. It enhances propagation on all HF frequencies
B. It disrupts signals on lower frequencies more than those on higher frequencies
C. It disrupts communications via satellite more than direct communications
D. None, because only areas on the night side of the Earth are affected
G3A02 GCLM Page (8 - 11)
What effect does a Sudden Ionospheric Disturbance have on the daytime ionospheric propagation of HF radio waves?
A. It enhances propagation on all HF frequencies
B. It disrupts signals on lower frequencies more than those on higher frequencies
C. It disrupts communications via satellite more than direct communications
D. None, because only areas on the night side of the Earth are affected
(B) G3A02 GCLM Page (8 - 11)
How long does it take charged particles from coronal mass ejections to affect radio propagation on Earth?
A. 28 days
B. 14 days
C. 4 to 8 minutes
D. 20 to 40 hours
G3A11 GCLM Page (8 - 11)
How long does it take charged particles from coronal mass ejections to affect radio propagation on Earth?
A. 28 days
B. 14 days
C. 4 to 8 minutes
D. 20 to 40 hours
(D) G3A11 GCLM Page (8 - 11)
What is a geomagnetic storm?
A. A sudden drop in the solar flux index
B. A thunderstorm that affects radio propagation
C. Ripples in the ionosphere
D. A temporary disturbance in Earth’s magnetosphere
G3A06 GCLM Page (8 - 11)
What is a geomagnetic storm?
A. A sudden drop in the solar flux index
B. A thunderstorm that affects radio propagation
C. Ripples in the ionosphere
D. A temporary disturbance in Earth’s magnetosphere
(D) G3A06 GCLM Page (8 - 11)
Which of the following effects can a geomagnetic storm have on radio propagation?
A. Improved high-latitude HF propagation
B. Degraded high-latitude HF propagation
C. Improved ground wave propagation
D. Degraded ground wave propagation
G3A08 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
Which of the following effects can a geomagnetic storm have on radio propagation?
A. Improved high-latitude HF propagation
B. Degraded high-latitude HF propagation
C. Improved ground wave propagation
D. Degraded ground wave propagation
(B) G3A08 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
How are radio communications usually affected by the charged particles that reach Earth from solar coronal holes?
A. HF communications are improved
B. HF communications are disturbed
C. VHF/UHF ducting is improved
D. VHF/UHF ducting is disturbed
G3A14 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
How are radio communications usually affected by the charged particles that reach Earth from solar coronal holes?
A. HF communications are improved
B. HF communications are disturbed
C. VHF/UHF ducting is improved
D. VHF/UHF ducting is disturbed
(B) G3A14 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
What benefit can high geomagnetic activity have on radio communications?
A. Auroras that can reflect VHF signals
B. Higher signal strength for HF signals passing through the polar regions
C. Improved HF long path propagation
D. Reduced long delayed echoes
G3A09 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
What benefit can high geomagnetic activity have on radio communications?
A. Auroras that can reflect VHF signals
B. Higher signal strength for HF signals passing through the polar regions
C. Improved HF long path propagation
D. Reduced long delayed echoes
(A) G3A09 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
8.3 Scatter Modes
G3C06 — What is a characteristic of HF scatter? G3C07 — What makes HF scatter signals often sound distorted? G3C08 — Why are HF scatter signals in the skip zone usually weak? G3C09 — Which of the following types of radio wave propagation might allow communications
with stations in the skip zone between the end of ground wave propagation and the beginning of ionospheric propagation?
G3C10 — What is Near Vertical Incidence Skywave (NVIS) propagation?
What type of propagation allows signals to be heard in the transmitting station’s skip zone?
A. Faraday rotation
B. Scatter
C. Chordal hop
D. Short-path
G3C09 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
What type of propagation allows signals to be heard in the transmitting station’s skip zone?
A. Faraday rotation
B. Scatter
C. Chordal hop
D. Short-path
(B) G3C09 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
What is a characteristic of HF scatter?
A. Phone signals have high intelligibility
B. Signals have a fluttering sound
C. There are very large, sudden swings in signal strength
D. Scatter propagation occurs only at night
G3C06 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
What is a characteristic of HF scatter?
A. Phone signals have high intelligibility
B. Signals have a fluttering sound
C. There are very large, sudden swings in signal strength
D. Scatter propagation occurs only at night
(B) G3C06 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
What makes HF scatter signals often sound distorted?
A. The ionospheric layer involved is unstable
B. Ground waves are absorbing much of the signal
C. The E-region is not present
D. Energy is scattered into the skip zone through several different radio wave paths
G3C07 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
What makes HF scatter signals often sound distorted?
A. The ionospheric layer involved is unstable
B. Ground waves are absorbing much of the signal
C. The E-region is not present
D. Energy is scattered into the skip zone through several different radio wave paths
(D) G3C07 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
Why are HF scatter signals in the skip zone usually weak?
A. Only a small part of the signal energy is scattered into the skip zone
B. Signals are scattered from the magnetosphere, which is not a good reflector
C. Propagation is through ground waves, which absorb most of the signal energy
D. Propagation is through ducts in the F region, which absorb most of the energy
G3C08 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
Why are HF scatter signals in the skip zone usually weak?
A. Only a small part of the signal energy is scattered into the skip zone
B. Signals are scattered from the magnetosphere, which is not a good reflector
C. Propagation is through ground waves, which absorb most of the signal energy
D. Propagation is through ducts in the F region, which absorb most of the energy
(A) G3C08 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
What is Near Vertical Incidence Skywave (NVIS) propagation?
A. Propagation near the MUF
B. Short distance MF or HF propagation using high elevation angles
C. Long path HF propagation at sunrise and sunset
D. Double hop propagation near the LUF
G3C10 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
What is Near Vertical Incidence Skywave (NVIS) propagation?
A. Propagation near the MUF
B. Short distance MF or HF propagation using high elevation angles
C. Long path HF propagation at sunrise and sunset
D. Double hop propagation near the LUF
(B) G3C10 GCLM Page (8 - 12)
Course Overview
IntroductionProcedures and Practices
Rules and RegulationsComponents and Circuits
Radio Signals and EquipmentDigital Modes
AntennasPropagation
Electrical and RF Safety
9.1 Electrical Safety
SOLDERING SAFETY
G0B10 — Which of the following is a danger from lead-tin solder?
Which of the following is a danger from lead-tin solder?
A. Lead can contaminate food if hands are not washed carefully after handling the solder
B. High voltages can cause lead-tin solder to disintegrate suddenly
C. Tin in the solder can “cold flow,” causing shorts in the circuit
D. RF energy can convert the lead into a poisonous gas
G0B10 GCLM Page (9 - 3)
Which of the following is a danger from lead-tin solder?
A. Lead can contaminate food if hands are not washed carefully after handling the solder
B. High voltages can cause lead-tin solder to disintegrate suddenly
C. Tin in the solder can “cold flow,” causing shorts in the circuit
D. RF energy can convert the lead into a poisonous gas
(A) G0B10 GCLM Page (9 - 3)
WIRING PRACTICES
G0B01 — Which wire or wires in a four-conductor connection should be attached to fuses or circuit breakers in a device operated from a 240 VAC single phase source?
G0B02 — What is the minimum wire size that may be safely used for a circuit that draws up to 20 amperes of continuous current?
G0B03 — Which size of fuse or circuit breaker would be appropriate to use with a circuit that uses AWG number 14 wiring? G0B05 — Which of the following conditions will cause a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) to disconnect the 120 or 240
Volt AC line power to a device? G0B06 — Which of the following is covered by the National Electrical Code? G0B12 — What is the purpose of a power supply interlock?
Which of the following is covered by the National Electrical Code?
A. Acceptable bandwidth limits
B. Acceptable modulation limits
C. Electrical safety inside the ham shack
D. RF exposure limits of the human body
G0B06 GCLM Page (9 - 4)
Which of the following is covered by the National Electrical Code?
A. Acceptable bandwidth limits
B. Acceptable modulation limits
C. Electrical safety inside the ham shack
D. RF exposure limits of the human body
(C) G0B06 GCLM Page (9 - 4)
According the National Electrical Code, what is the minimum wire size that may be used safely for wiring with a
20 ampere circuit breaker?
A. AWG number 20
B. AWG number 16
C. AWG number 12
D. AWG number 8
G0B02 GCLM Page (9 - 5)
According the National Electrical Code, what is the minimum wire size that may be used safely for wiring with a
20 ampere circuit breaker?
A. AWG number 20
B. AWG number 16
C. AWG number 12
D. AWG number 8
(C) G0B02 GCLM Page (9 - 5)
Which size of fuse or circuit breaker would be appropriate to use with a circuit that uses AWG number 14 wiring?
A. 100 amperes
B. 60 amperes
C. 30 amperes
D. 15 amperes
G0B03 GCLM Page (9 - 5)
Which size of fuse or circuit breaker would be appropriate to use with a circuit that uses AWG number 14 wiring?
A. 100 amperes
B. 60 amperes
C. 30 amperes
D. 15 amperes
(D) G0B03 GCLM Page (9 - 5)
Which wire or wires in a four-conductor connection should be attached to fuses or circuit breakers in a device operated from a
240 VAC single phase source?
A. Only the two wires carrying voltage
B. Only the neutral wire
C. Only the ground wire
D. All wires
G0B01 GCLM Page (9 - 5)
Which wire or wires in a four-conductor connection should be attached to fuses or circuit breakers in a device operated from a
240 VAC single phase source?
A. Only the two wires carrying voltage
B. Only the neutral wire
C. Only the ground wire
D. All wires
(A) G0B01 GCLM Page (9 - 5)
Which of the following conditions will cause a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) to disconnect the 120 or 240 Volt AC
line power to a device?
A. Current flowing from one or more of the voltage-carrying wires to the neutral wire
B. Current flowing from one or more of the voltage-carrying wires directly to ground
C. Overvoltage on the voltage-carrying wires
D. All these choices are correct
G0B05 GCLM Page (9 - 6)
Which of the following conditions will cause a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) to disconnect the 120 or 240 Volt AC
line power to a device?
A. Current flowing from one or more of the voltage-carrying wires to the neutral wire
B. Current flowing from one or more of the voltage-carrying wires directly to ground
C. Overvoltage on the voltage-carrying wires
D. All these choices are correct
(B) G0B05 GCLM Page (9 - 6)
What is the purpose of a power supply interlock?
A. To prevent unauthorized changes to the circuit that would void the manufacturer’s warranty
B. To shut down the unit if it becomes too hot
C. To ensure that dangerous voltages are removed if the cabinet is opened
D. To shut off the power supply if too much voltage is produced
G0B12 GCLM Page (9 - 6)
What is the purpose of a power supply interlock?
A. To prevent unauthorized changes to the circuit that would void the manufacturer’s warranty
B. To shut down the unit if it becomes too hot
C. To ensure that dangerous voltages are removed if the cabinet is opened
D. To shut off the power supply if too much voltage is produced
(C) G0B12 GCLM Page (9 - 6)
GENERATOR SAFETY
G0B04 — Which of the following is a primary reason for not placing a gasoline-fueled generator inside an occupied area?
G0B09 — Which of the following is true of an emergency generator installation? G0B13 — What must you do when powering your house from an emergency generator?
Which of the following is a primary reason for not placing a gasoline-fueled generator inside an occupied area?
A. Danger of carbon monoxide poisoning
B. Danger of engine over torque
C. Lack of oxygen for adequate combustion
D. Lack of nitrogen for adequate combustion
G0B04 GCLM Page (9 - 7)
Which of the following is a primary reason for not placing a gasoline-fueled generator inside an occupied area?
A. Danger of carbon monoxide poisoning
B. Danger of engine over torque
C. Lack of oxygen for adequate combustion
D. Lack of nitrogen for adequate combustion
(A) G0B04 GCLM Page (9 - 7)
Which of the following is true of an emergency generator installation?
A. The generator should be located in a well-ventilated area
B. The generator must be insulated from ground
C. Fuel should be stored near the generator for rapid refueling in case of an emergency
D. All these choices are correct
G0B09 GCLM Page (9 - 7)
Which of the following is true of an emergency generator installation?
A. The generator should be located in a well-ventilated area
B. The generator must be insulated from ground
C. Fuel should be stored near the generator for rapid refueling in case of an emergency
D. All these choices are correct
(A) G0B09 GCLM Page (9 - 7)
What must you do when powering your house from an emergency generator?
A. Disconnect the incoming utility power feed
B. Insure that the generator is not grounded
C. Insure that all lightning grounds are disconnected
D. All these choices are correct
G0B13 GCLM Page (9 - 7)
What must you do when powering your house from an emergency generator?
A. Disconnect the incoming utility power feed
B. Insure that the generator is not grounded
C. Insure that all lightning grounds are disconnected
D. All these choices are correct
(A) G0B13 GCLM Page (9 - 7)
LIGHTNING
G4C07 — Why should soldered joints not be used with the wires that connect the base of a tower to a system of ground rods?
G0B11 — Which of the following is good practice for lightning protection grounds?
Which of the following is good practice for lightning protection grounds?
A. They must be bonded to all buried water and gas lines
B. Bends in ground wires must be made as close as possible to a right angle
C. Lightning grounds must be connected to all ungrounded wiring
D. They must be bonded together with all other grounds
G0B11 GCLM Page (9 - 8)
Which of the following is good practice for lightning protection grounds?
A. They must be bonded to all buried water and gas lines
B. Bends in ground wires must be made as close as possible to a right angle
C. Lightning grounds must be connected to all ungrounded wiring
D. They must be bonded together with all other grounds
(D) G0B11 GCLM Page (9 - 8)
Why should soldered joints not be used with the wires that connect the base of a tower to a system of ground rods?
A. The resistance of solder is too high
B. Solder flux will prevent a low conductivity connection
C. Solder has too high a dielectric constant to provide adequate lightning protection
D. A soldered joint will likely be destroyed by the heat of a lightning strike
G4C07 GCLM Page (9 - 8)
Why should soldered joints not be used with the wires that connect the base of a tower to a system of ground rods?
A. The resistance of solder is too high
B. Solder flux will prevent a low conductivity connection
C. Solder has too high a dielectric constant to provide adequate lightning protection
D. A soldered joint will likely be destroyed by the heat of a lightning strike
(D) G4C07 GCLM Page (9 - 8)
9.2 RF Exposure
G0A01 — What is one way that RF energy can affect human body tissue? G0A02 — Which of the following properties is important in estimating whether an RF signal exceeds the maximum permissible
exposure (MPE)? G0A03 — How can you determine that your station complies with FCC RF exposure regulations? G0A04 — What does “time averaging” mean in reference to RF radiation exposure? G0A05 — What must you do if an evaluation of your station shows RF energy radiated from your station exceeds permissible
limits? G0A06 — What precaution should be taken when installing a ground-mounted antenna? G0A07 — What effect does transmitter duty cycle have when evaluating RF exposure? G0A08 — Which of the following steps must an amateur operator take to ensure compliance with RF safety regulations when
transmitter power exceeds levels specified in FCC Part 97.13? G0A09 — What type of instrument can be used to accurately measure an RF field? G0A10 — What is one thing that can be done if evaluation shows that a neighbor might receive more than the allowable limit of
RF exposure from the main lobe of a directional antenna? G0A11 — What precaution should you take if you install an indoor transmitting antenna?
Which of the following properties is important in estimating whether an RF signal exceeds the maximum permissible
exposure (MPE)?
A. Its duty cycle
B. Its frequency
C. Its power density
D. All these choices are correct
G0A02 GCLM Page (9 - 9)
Which of the following properties is important in estimating whether an RF signal exceeds the maximum permissible
exposure (MPE)?
A. Its duty cycle
B. Its frequency
C. Its power density
D. All these choices are correct
(D) G0A02 GCLM Page (9 - 9)
What is one way that RF energy can affect human body tissue?
A. It heats body tissue
B. It causes radiation poisoning
C. It causes the blood count to reach a dangerously low level
D. It cools body tissue
G0A01 GCLM Page (9 - 9)
What is one way that RF energy can affect human body tissue?
A. It heats body tissue
B. It causes radiation poisoning
C. It causes the blood count to reach a dangerously low level
D. It cools body tissue
(A) G0A01 GCLM Page (9 - 9)
What does “time averaging” mean in reference to RF radiation exposure?
A. The average amount of power developed by the transmitter over a specific 24-hour period
B. The average time it takes RF radiation to have any long-term effect on the body
C. The total time of the exposure
D. The total RF exposure averaged over a certain time
G0A04 GCLM Page (9 - 10)
What does “time averaging” mean in reference to RF radiation exposure?
A. The average amount of power developed by the transmitter over a specific 24-hour period
B. The average time it takes RF radiation to have any long-term effect on the body
C. The total time of the exposure
D. The total RF exposure averaged over a certain time
(D) G0A04 GCLM Page (9 - 10)
What effect does transmitter duty cycle have when evaluating RF exposure?
A. A lower transmitter duty cycle permits greater short-term exposure levels
B. A higher transmitter duty cycle permits greater short-term exposure levels
C. Low duty cycle transmitters are exempt from RF exposure evaluation requirements
D. High duty cycle transmitters are exempt from RF exposure requirements
G0A07 GCLM Page (9 - 11)
What effect does transmitter duty cycle have when evaluating RF exposure?
A. A lower transmitter duty cycle permits greater short-term exposure levels
B. A higher transmitter duty cycle permits greater short-term exposure levels
C. Low duty cycle transmitters are exempt from RF exposure evaluation requirements
D. High duty cycle transmitters are exempt from RF exposure requirements
(A) G0A07 GCLM Page (9 - 11)
Which of the following steps must an amateur operator take to ensure compliance with RF safety regulations when transmitter
power exceeds levels specified in FCC Part 97.13?
A. Post a copy of FCC Part 97.13 in the station
B. Post a copy of OET Bulletin 65 in the station
C. Perform a routine RF exposure evaluation
D. Contact the FCC for a visit to conduct a station evaluation
G0A08 GCLM Page (9 - 12)
Which of the following steps must an amateur operator take to ensure compliance with RF safety regulations when transmitter
power exceeds levels specified in FCC Part 97.13?
A. Post a copy of FCC Part 97.13 in the station
B. Post a copy of OET Bulletin 65 in the station
C. Perform a routine RF exposure evaluation
D. Contact the FCC for a visit to conduct a station evaluation
(C) G0A08 GCLM Page (9 - 12)
What type of instrument can be used to accurately measure an RF field?
A. A receiver with an S meter
B. A calibrated field strength meter with a calibrated antenna
C. An SWR meter with a peak-reading function
D. An oscilloscope with a high-stability crystal marker generator
G0A09 GCLM Page (9 - 12)
What type of instrument can be used to accurately measure an RF field?
A. A receiver with an S meter
B. A calibrated field strength meter with a calibrated antenna
C. An SWR meter with a peak-reading function
D. An oscilloscope with a high-stability crystal marker generator
(B) G0A09 GCLM Page (9 - 12)
How can you determine that your station complies with FCC RF exposure regulations?
A. By calculation based on FCC OET Bulletin 65
B. By calculation based on computer modeling
C. By measurement of field strength using calibrated equipment
D. All these choices are correct
FCC Rule: [97.13(c)(1)] G0A03 GCLM Page (9 - 12)
How can you determine that your station complies with FCC RF exposure regulations?
A. By calculation based on FCC OET Bulletin 65
B. By calculation based on computer modeling
C. By measurement of field strength using calibrated equipment
D. All these choices are correct
(D) FCC Rule: [97.13(c)(1)] G0A03 GCLM Page (9 - 12)
What must you do if an evaluation of your station shows RF energy radiated from your station exceeds permissible limits?
A. Take action to prevent human exposure to the excessive RF fields
B. File an Environmental Impact Statement (EIS-97) with the FCC
C. Secure written permission from your neighbors to operate above the controlled MPE limits
D. All these choices are correct
G0A05 GCLM Page (9 - 13)
What must you do if an evaluation of your station shows RF energy radiated from your station exceeds permissible limits?
A. Take action to prevent human exposure to the excessive RF fields
B. File an Environmental Impact Statement (EIS-97) with the FCC
C. Secure written permission from your neighbors to operate above the controlled MPE limits
D. All these choices are correct
(A) G0A05 GCLM Page (9 - 13)
What precaution should be taken when installing a ground-mounted antenna?
A. It should not be installed higher than you can reach
B. It should not be installed in a wet area
C. It should be limited to 10 feet in height
D. It should be installed such that it is protected against unauthorized access
G0A06 GCLM Page (9 - 13)
What precaution should be taken when installing a ground-mounted antenna?
A. It should not be installed higher than you can reach
B. It should not be installed in a wet area
C. It should be limited to 10 feet in height
D. It should be installed such that it is protected against unauthorized access
(D) G0A06 GCLM Page (9 - 13)
What is one thing that can be done if evaluation shows that a neighbor might receive more than the allowable limit of RF
exposure from the main lobe of a directional antenna?
A. Change to a non-polarized antenna with higher gain
B. Post a warning sign that is clearly visible to the neighbor
C. Use an antenna with a higher front-to-back ratio
D. Take precautions to ensure that the antenna cannot be pointed in their direction
G0A10 GCLM Page (9 - 13)
What is one thing that can be done if evaluation shows that a neighbor might receive more than the allowable limit of RF
exposure from the main lobe of a directional antenna?
A. Change to a non-polarized antenna with higher gain
B. Post a warning sign that is clearly visible to the neighbor
C. Use an antenna with a higher front-to-back ratio
D. Take precautions to ensure that the antenna cannot be pointed in their direction
(D) G0A10 GCLM Page (9 - 13)
What precaution should you take if you install an indoor transmitting antenna?
A. Locate the antenna close to your operating position to minimize feed-line radiation
B. Position the antenna along the edge of a wall to reduce parasitic radiation
C. Make sure that MPE limits are not exceeded in occupied areas
D. Make sure the antenna is properly shielded
G0A11 GCLM Page (9 - 14)
What precaution should you take if you install an indoor transmitting antenna?
A. Locate the antenna close to your operating position to minimize feed-line radiation
B. Position the antenna along the edge of a wall to reduce parasitic radiation
C. Make sure that MPE limits are not exceeded in occupied areas
D. Make sure the antenna is properly shielded
(C) G0A11 GCLM Page (9 - 14)
9.3 Outdoor Safety
G0B07 — Which of these choices should be observed when climbing a tower using a safety belt or harness?
G0B08 — What should be done by any person preparing to climb a tower that supports electrically powered devices?
G0B14 — What precaution should you take whenever you adjust or repair an antenna?
What should be done by any person preparing to climb a tower that supports electrically powered devices?
A. Notify the electric company that a person will be working on the tower
B. Make sure all circuits that supply power to the tower are locked out and tagged
C. Unground the base of the tower
D. All these choices are correct
G0B08 GCLM Page (9 - 15)
What should be done by any person preparing to climb a tower that supports electrically powered devices?
A. Notify the electric company that a person will be working on the tower
B. Make sure all circuits that supply power to the tower are locked out and tagged
C. Unground the base of the tower
D. All these choices are correct
(B) G0B08 GCLM Page (9 - 15)
What precaution should you take whenever you adjust or repair an antenna?
A. Ensure that you and the antenna structure are grounded
B. Turn off the transmitter and disconnect the feed line
C. Wear a radiation badge
D. All these choices are correct
G0B14 GCLM Page (9 - 15)
What precaution should you take whenever you adjust or repair an antenna?
A. Ensure that you and the antenna structure are grounded
B. Turn off the transmitter and disconnect the feed line
C. Wear a radiation badge
D. All these choices are correct
(B) G0B14 GCLM Page (9 - 15)
Which of these choices should be observed when climbing a tower using a safety belt or harness?
A. Never lean back and rely on the belt alone to support your weight
B. Confirm that the belt is rated for the weight of the climber and that it is within its allowable service life
C. Ensure that all heavy tools are securely fastened to the belt D-ring
D. All these choices are correct
G0B07 GCLM Page (9 - 15)
Which of these choices should be observed when climbing a tower using a safety belt or harness?
A. Never lean back and rely on the belt alone to support your weight
B. Confirm that the belt is rated for the weight of the climber and that it is within its allowable service life
C. Ensure that all heavy tools are securely fastened to the belt D-ring
D. All these choices are correct
(B) G0B07 GCLM Page (9 - 15)
Fine